Quarterlytics / Financial Services / Asset Management / IP Group Plc

IP Group Plc

ipo · LSE Financial Services
Claim this profile
Ticker ipo
Exchange LSE
Sector Financial Services
Industry Asset Management
Employees 51-200
← All annual reports
FY2013 Annual Report · IP Group Plc
Sign in to download
Loading PDF…
Building
outstanding
businesses

I

P

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

3

Annual Report and Accounts 
for the year ended 31 December 2013
Stock Code: IPO

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
 
Welcome to IP Group

IP Group plc develops intellectual  
property-based businesses

IP Group’s purpose is to systematically help create, build and support 
outstanding intellectual property-based businesses in order to provide 
attractive returns for our shareholders and other stakeholders.

We provide our portfolio companies with financial capital from our balance sheet and also from funds 
that we manage on behalf of others. Critically, in addition to financial capital, we provide a range of 
support services to our portfolio companies, including executive search and recruitment, corporate 
finance and capital raising, legal, accounting, company secretarial, strategic expertise and consultancy.

We pioneered the concept of a long-term partnership model with universities and have arrangements 
covering a number of the UK’s leading research-intensive universities, as well as initial partnerships in  
the US.

Our strategic objectives

•	 To build and maintain a pipeline of compelling intellectual 

property-based opportunities 

•	 To develop these opportunities into a diversified portfolio  

of robust businesses

•	 To grow our assets and those we manage on  

behalf of third parties

•	 To deliver attractive financial returns from our assets

Investor website

We maintain a corporate website at www.ipgroupplc.com containing a wide variety of information of 
interest to institutional and private investors, including latest news, press releases, annual reports and 
further information on our portfolio companies.

Getting around the report

For further information within  
this document

Additional information online at: 
www.ipgroupplc.com

Disclaimer: This Annual Report and Accounts may contain forward-looking statements. These statements reflect the Board’s 
current view, are subject to a number of material risks and uncertainties and could change in the future. Factors that could cause or 
contribute to such changes include, but are not limited to, the general economic climate and market conditions, as well as specific 
factors relating to the financial or commercial prospects or performance of individual companies within the Group’s portfolio. Further 
details can be found in the Risk management section on pages 32 to 37.

Throughout this Annual Report and Accounts, the Group’s holdings in portfolio companies reflect the undiluted beneficial equity 
interest excluding debt, unless otherwise explicitly stated. 

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Highlights

Net assets (£m)

£336.6m  (2012: £263.1m)

336.6

263.1

221.6

171.0

173.1

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

Share price performance 

+42%  (2012: 53%)

157%

53%

42%

6%

(46%)

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

Financial and  
Operational highlights
•	 Adjusted profit before tax of £77.6m 
(2012: £46.7m), excluding £5.0m 
reduction in fair value of Oxford Equity 
Rights asset (2012: £6.0m)

•	 Net cash and deposits as at  
31 December 2013: £24.1m  
(2012: £47.9m)

•	 New intellectual property 

commercialisation agreement signed 
with The University of Manchester

•	 £5m investment in Cambridge 
Innovation Capital plc and 
memorandum of understanding 
signed to share information on  
co-investment opportunities

•	 First US pilot IP commercialisation 

agreements signed with the University 
of Pennsylvania and Columbia 
University

•	 Launch of £30m IP Venture Fund II  
in partnership with the European 
Investment Fund

Portfolio highlights
•	 Fair value of portfolio:  

£285.9m (2012: £181.8m) 

•	 Capital provided to portfolio 

Post-year-end highlights
•	 £100m (before expenses) raised 

through issue of new equity capital in 
February 2014 

companies: £27.5m (2012: £26.3m)

•	 Announced the recommended 

•	 Portfolio realisations:  
£5.5m (2012: £16.7m)

•	 Value of ten largest holdings:  
£225.2m (2012: £138.2m) 

•	 Group’s portfolio companies raised  
in excess of £160m of new capital 
(2012: £110m)

 — Applied Graphene Materials plc 
admitted to AIM, raising gross 
proceeds of £11m at IPO

 — Oxford Nanopore Technologies 
Limited completed £40m private 
financing 

proposed acquisition of the remaining 
79.9% shareholding in Fusion IP plc 
not currently owned by the Group 
in an all-paper transaction to be 
implemented by way of a court-
sanctioned scheme of arrangement 

•	 Net unrealised fair value increase 
in the Group’s holdings in quoted 
portfolio companies of £23.6m 
between 31 December 2013 and  
28 February 2014, including admission 
to AIM of Actual Experience plc

What’s inside

Strategic Report

Overview

Highlights 

Chairman’s statement 

Our Business & Strategy

Business model 

Marketplace 

Our portfolio at a glance 

Strategy 

Our Performance

Operational review 

Portfolio review 

Financial review 

Key performance indicators 

Risk Management 

Our Governance

Overview

Board of Directors 

Corporate governance 

Sustainability 

Committee Reports

Directors’ Remuneration Report  

Report of the Audit Committee 

Other Statutory

Directors’ report 

Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities 

Our Financials

Independent auditor’s report 

Group Primary Statements

Consolidated statement of  
comprehensive income 

Consolidated statement of  
financial position 

Consolidated statement of cash flows  

Consolidated statement of  
changes in equity 

Group Notes

Notes to the consolidated  
financial statements 

Company Statements

Company balance sheet 

Notes to the financial statements 

Company information 

01

02

04

06

08

10

12

14

27

30

32

38

40

50

53

71

74

76

77

80

81

82

83

84

108

109

112

01

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report OverviewChairman’s statement

A successful year:  
our strongest ever  
set of results 

I am pleased to report that 2013 has been 
a year of strong performance for IP Group 
which has resulted in a significant increase 
in the value of the Group’s portfolio and its 
net assets. 

Building on this success we also made two 
significant announcements in early 2014. First 
we completed an equity capital raise that, due 
to significant demand from new and existing 
shareholders, was increased in size to £100m 
(before expenses) and, second, we reached 
agreement on the terms of a recommended offer 
to acquire the remaining 79.9% of Fusion IP plc not 
already owned by the Group. The latter is subject to 
a scheme of arrangement and we anticipate that the 
transaction will complete in late March, creating a 
business with an enlarged specialised team, access 
to IP from 15 of the UK’s, and two of the US’s, top 
research universities, a portfolio with a value in 
excess of £300m and approximately £140m of cash.

Dr Bruce Smith  Chairman

The Group’s financial performance 
in 2013 was the strongest since its 
formation in 2001. The overall value of 
our holdings in portfolio companies has 
significantly increased and this has led to 
net assets, excluding intangibles and the 
Oxford Equity Rights asset, increasing to 
£315.5m (2012: £236.6m), representing 
33% growth. In income terms, the Group 
recorded an adjusted profit before tax of 
£77.6m excluding the £5.0m reduction 
in the value of the Oxford Equity Rights 
asset (2012: £46.7m profit; £6.0m 
reduction). Whilst both 2012 and 2013 
have seen a very positive performance,  
it remains important for our shareholders 
to note that, due to the long-term 
nature of the Group’s business, profits 
and especially cash realisations can vary 
significantly from year to year.

The Group has continued to support its 
portfolio companies by both providing 
capital from its balance sheet and 
managed funds, and assisting them in 
sourcing further capital from a variety 
of sources. There continues to be a 
comparatively low number of investors 
seeking to deploy significant capital 
into early-stage technology business 
although the environment has been more 
favourable in recent times, particularly 
in the public markets. Looking at the 
AIM market, for example, capital raised 
through primary and secondary issues 
increased by nearly 25% in 2013 to 
£3.9bn, although this remains significantly 
below the £16bn levels seen in 2006 
and 2007. Our portfolio companies fared 
well in this regard, raising approximately 
£160m of capital during the year (2012: 
£110m). We were also pleased to 
announce the launch of our £30m IP 
Venture Fund II in partnership with the 
EIF which will provide additional capital 
for the development of our new spin-out 
companies. 

02

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Strategic Report OverviewIP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Testimonial: 
Business Building

“I am very impressed 
with IP Group’s business 
model from an investee company 
perspective. IP Group offers Ceres 
Power its support across the board. 
As well as access to the investment 
community and its long-term view 
on the business, what is great is its 
team in London. They have fields 
of expertise that small companies 
don’t have, they understand 
the business and offer advice, 
knowledge and support whilst 
allowing the management team to 
deliver.“ 

Richard Preston, Finance Director  
Ceres Power Holdings plc

Another important element of the 
Group’s model is its access to world-class 
commercialisable intellectual property 
through the formation of long-term 
relationships across a wide pool of 
research institutions. Having announced 
our new proof of concept partnership 
with the University of Manchester in 
early 2013, we were pleased to be able 
to announce the expansion of this 
relationship in January 2014 to include 
graphene projects and the extension 
of its term to 2019. During the year we 
also agreed to take an 8% equity holding 
in Cambridge Innovation Capital plc 
(“CIC”) as part of its £50m fundraising. 
CIC will support the growth of innovative 
businesses in the “Cambridge Cluster” 
and, through our memorandum of 
understanding, we have agreed to 
share information on co-investment 
opportunities in this region. It should 
also be noted that the Group’s original 
contract with Oxford’s Department of 
Chemistry expires at the end of 2015 
although our access to innovation 
from Oxford’s Institute for Biomedical 
Engineering runs until 2023. Outside of 
the UK, we announced two exciting new 
relationships with East Coast Ivy League 
universities in the US, Columbia University 
and The University of Pennsylvania. We 
look forward to working with academics 
and staff from our new partners, as well 
as with those universities with whom we 
already have significant track records, to 
identify backable commercial IP.

The Group’s Board has seen three 
changes since my 2012 statement. Firstly, 
I am very pleased to be able to welcome 
Professor Lynn Gladden to the Board. 
Professor Gladden, currently Pro-Vice-
Chancellor for Research for the University 
of Cambridge, has an impeccable track 
record in academia as well as extensive 
experience in industry, a combination 
highly relevant to the Group’s business 
model. Secondly, as previously 
announced, during the year Dr Alison 
Fielding and Professor Graham Richards 
stepped down from the Group’s Board, 
in the case of Dr Fielding for personal 
reasons and in the case of Professor 
Richards because the length of his tenure 
as a non-executive director meant that he 
was no longer regarded as independent 
from a governance perspective. I am 

pleased to report that Dr Fielding and 
Professor Richards both remain with the 
Group on a part-time basis in roles that 
are enabling the Group to continue to 
leverage their significant expertise.

The Group’s success in the last twelve 
months would have been impossible 
without the contributions of many 
people and, as always, I am proud of and 
thankful for these efforts. I would also 
like to formally note my thanks to the 
Group’s stakeholders, particularly for the 
overwhelming support from shareholders 
for the Group’s capital raising that we 
completed in February. I would also 
like to extend a warm welcome to the 
staff from Fusion IP plc, who, assuming 
our recommended offer completes as 
anticipated in March 2014, will all be 
offered positions within the IP Group 
team. David Baynes, Fusion IP’s CEO, 
and Doug Liversidge, its Chairman, are 
proposed additions to the Group’s Board 
upon completion as executive director 
and non-executive director respectively. 
We look forward to working together 
effectively to identify and develop the 
most exciting spin-outs from across all of 
our partner universities.

The sector in which the Group operates, 
namely IP commercialisation, appears 
to be gaining further attention with a 
number of new entrants being seen in 
the market in 2013. Several companies 
or funds raised capital with the explicit 
intention of seeking to develop spin-out 
companies from universities in the UK, as 
well as in the US and other countries. I 
believe that this asset class will continue 
to develop and no doubt the Group will 
support spin-out companies alongside 
some of these new entrants; as may 
be the case under the memorandum 
of understanding that we have with 
Cambridge Innovation Capital plc, 
alongside our 8% equity holding. I also 
believe that the Group’s track record and 
expertise in its field, coupled with its long-
term university partnerships and strong 
balance sheet, leaves it well placed to 
continue to generate significant value for 
shareholders over the long term. 

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman
3 March 2014

03

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report OverviewBusiness model

Our business model:  
turning innovation  
into successful 
businesses

Deal flow

Mature economies looking to exploit knowledge:
• Funding for academic research
• Framework for solutions to 
social/environmental problems

Leading 
research intensive 
institutions
Science

Institutional 
finance
The City

Business 
building

Identifying promising research 
opportunities with disruptive IP potential 
across 5 core sectors

Supporting businesses from cradle to maturity with:
• Strategic and commercial expertise  • Executive recruitment
• Administrative and company secretarial  support  
• Legal expertise  • Building management teams

Allowing founders to 
concentrate on exploiting IP

Capital

Providing access to capital through:
• IP Group balance sheet
• Venture capital funds
• Networks of co-investors

Patient 
capital
10+ Yrs

Systematic
globalisation of 
intellectual
property

Cradle 
to maturity
capability

Long-term 
trusted
partnerships

Long-term value

04

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Business & StrategyDeal flow
– pipeline of potentially disruptive commercialisable intellectual property 

An important aspect of IP Group’s strategy is its ability to access a wide range of leading scientific research. This has been 
achieved primarily through long-term partner relationships with a number of leading research universities in the UK. Recently the 
Group announced that it had expanded its access to intellectual property beyond the UK to the US. The Group’s specialist in-
house sourcing team works with our partners, as well as academics from other universities and research institutions, to identify 
and pursue compelling opportunities arising from these institutions and to create and build businesses around this research. 

Business Building
– a rigorous and systematic approach to opportunity appraisal, development and business building

During the early stages of an opportunity’s development, members of the Group’s team work closely with its founders to help shape 
its strategic direction, often taking an interim management role until such time as the business reaches a sufficient stage of maturity 
and has the resources to recruit a full external leadership team. 

IP Group utilises its in-house executive search consultancy, IP Exec, to recruit experienced and high-calibre individuals to lead 
its developing businesses alongside founders and the Group team members, who continue to provide strategic guidance in an 
executive or non-executive capacity. Further, IP Group, through its in-house division, IP Impact, has developed a series of innovative 
programmes that, by working with the CEOs and boards of portfolio companies, seek to help accelerate company growth.

The Group also provides operational, legal, business and company secretarial support to its companies with a view to minimising the 
most common administrative factors that can contribute to early-stage company failure.

 Read our testimonials on pages 03 and 13

Capital
– access to sources of capital to finance businesses as they develop

IP Group provides long-term capital for the development of its portfolio companies from its own balance sheet. In addition, IP Group 
has an FCA-regulated venture capital fund management subsidiary, Top Technology Ventures (“TTV”), which specialises in providing 
funding for early stage technology businesses. TTV currently manages three funds: IP Venture Fund (“IPVF”), IP Venture Fund II L.P. 
(“IPVFII”) and the Finance for Business North East Technology Fund (“NETF”) which, subject to investment guidelines, can provide 
further additional sources of capital to the Group’s portfolio companies. In addition, TTV and the Group work with a wide network of 
co-investors that can provide further capital alongside the Group.

 Read our testimonial on page 28

Long-term value
– systematic commercialisation of intellectual property

IP Group seeks to form, or assist in the formation of, spin-out companies based on scientific innovation, to take a significant minority 
equity stake in those spin-out companies and then to grow the value of that equity over time through taking an active role in spin-
out company development. IP Group’s approach has been to build significant minority equity stakes across a diversified portfolio of 
companies designed to achieve strong equity returns over the medium to long term.

05

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our Business & StrategyMarketplace

The landscape: IP Group 
offers more than traditional 
venture capital

Current economic climate
Although there are some signs of 
recovery in parts of the global economy, 
the overall environment remains 
uncertain and volatile. We have seen only 
low levels of GDP growth in Eurozone 
countries and sustained recovery is not 
yet assured. However, all of the six largest 
Eurozone economies recorded quarterly 
expansions in the final quarter of 2013 
for the first time in three years and the 
UK economy is forecast to grow faster 
than any other major European economy 
in 2014. Good growth is also expected 
in the US where an increasing number 
of the Group’s underlying portfolio 
companies operate. 

University research landscape
An important aspect of IP Group’s 
strategy is an ability to access a wide 
range of leading scientific research. This 
has been achieved primarily through 
long-term partner relationships with a 

number of leading research universities 
in the UK and other collaborative 
arrangements. 

The UK has long held a leading position 
in the global research landscape. It is 
home to some of the oldest and most 
prestigious learned societies in the 
sciences and has produced a number of 
the outstanding scientific breakthroughs 
of the last millennium. As a research 
nation, the UK continues to “punch 
above its weight” as most recently set 
out in a 2013 report prepared for the UK’s 
Department of Business, Innovation and 
Skills (“BIS”). A summary of some of the 
key data from this report is set out in the 
table above right, which highlights the 
UK’s global pedigree, with 16% of the 
world’s most highly cited publications 
being generated by a nation with less 
than 1% of the world’s total population 
and only 4% of the world’s researchers. 

Measure

Number of 
researchers

Scientific 
publications

UK % of 
total

World-
ranking

3.9%

6.4%

6

3

3

2

Cited publications

11.6%

Highly cited 
publications

15.9%

Source: Report “International Comparative Performance 
of the UK Research Base – 2013”

The most recent Research Assessments 
Exercise (the “RAE”), undertaken in 2008, 
analysed the quality of research carried 
out in UK research institutions. The RAE 
ranked each university by reference to 
the number of Category A researchers 
at such universities (broadly defined as 
someone who devotes the majority of his 
or her time to research) and measured 
the overall quality of the research 
emanating from each of these 

MARKET CAPITALISATION 

£112m

AIM admission

£335m

Official List admission

£898m

Date of report

2003 

IP Group floats  
on AIM

Signs agreement 
with King’s College, 
London

Signs agreement with 
CNAP, University of 
York

2001 

IP Group established

Agreement 
with Chemistry 
Department, 
University of Oxford 

2002 

Signs agreement 
with University of 
Southampton

Signs agreement with 
University of Leeds

2004 

2005 

2006 

2007 

Acquires Techtran 
in full

Signs agreement with 
University of Bristol

Proximagen plc & 
Getech Group plc 
float on AIM 

Acquires 19.9% stake 
in Techtran

Acquires Top 
Technology Ventures

Synairgen plc floats 
on AIM

OHM plc floats  
on AIM

Summit plc floats 
on AIM

IP Group joins Official 
List of LSE from AIM; 
raises c. £17m

Signs agreements 
with universities of 
Surrey, Glasgow, Bath, 
York & QMUL

Velocys plc, Avacta 
Group plc, Evocutis 
plc float on AIM

Launch of IP Venture 
Fund

Modern Water plc 
floats on AIM

Oxford Advanced 
Surfaces Group plc 
floats on AIM

Tracsis plc floats  
on AIM

Green Chemicals 
plc floats on PLUS 
Markets (now ISDX)

06

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Business & StrategyIt is not uncommon for such companies 
to act in a collaborative manner through 
syndication of investment. However, there 
are also occasions when a competitive 
approach is taken to achieving an 
interest in a particular company and its 
technology. Accordingly, the Group can 
face competition of this nature from 
a wide variety of categories of entity, 
including:

•	 specialist traditional venture capital 

investors;

•	

large private institutional investors;

•	 privately managed schemes based on 

government funding;

•	 private individuals, both acting 

individually or collectively as groups 
such as business angels networks or 
through beneficial tax mechanisms 
such as SEIS, EIS and VCTs; and

•	 direct public funding, for example 

the EU level JEREMIE fund and other 
national and local schemes.

In addition, certain universities and other 
research intensive institutions may in 
future become increasingly proactive 
themselves at seeking to raise private 
sector funding to support their in-house 
technology commercialisation activities.

institutions. Through its partnerships 
and other collaborative relationships, 
the Group has access to opportunities 
based on intellectual property generated 
at 15 of the UK’s highest-ranked research 
universities.

Outside of the UK, the Group has pilot 
agreements with two of the eight Ivy 
League universities in the north-eastern 
United States.

IP Group’s approach  
to commercialisation
To understand IP Group’s business model, 
it is important to differentiate it from 
the more traditional approach to the 
provision of “venture” capital to early-
stage businesses, which has tended to 
have been provided through fixed-life 
(typically ten year duration) funds to  
start-up businesses with existing 
management teams. 

In contrast, IP Group offers far more 
to its businesses than just capital, 
with a much greater involvement in 
providing its companies with access to 
early-stage business-building expertise, 
interim executive support, technical and 
commercial networks and senior team 
recruitment and development. The Group 
also provides operational, legal, business 
and company secretarial support to its 
companies with a view to minimising the 
most common administrative factors that 
can contribute to early-stage company 
failure. Further, the majority of capital 
provided by IP Group is not structured 
through fixed-life funds.

The 2012 British Venture Capital 
Association (“BVCA”) performance survey 
highlighted that the average return for 
post-dot com bubble (2002 onwards) 
traditionally structured venture funds was 
3.6% IRR (% p.a.). The median Total Value 
To Paid In Capital (“TVPI”) ratio for 2002 
onwards venture funds was 0.79× (i.e. 
the total value generated by the fund is 
79% of capital paid in) with the top decile 
performance being 1.61×. 

In contrast, the broadly equivalent 
measure for a gross TVPI ratio for the 
Group as at 31 December 2013 was 2.7× 
capital invested, suggesting the Group’s 
differentiated approach can generate 
above average returns. 

Competitive landscape
There are, however, a number of other 
companies and organisations seeking to 
commercialise intellectual property and/
or provide capital to spin-out companies 
from universities and research intensive 
institutions in the UK. Since the Kay 
Review in 2012 and the government’s 
response to it highlighted the importance 
of supporting innovative business over the 
longer term, the number of organisations 
operating in this sector has increased and 
it is considered that this trend is likely to 
continue. 

A number of businesses and funds 
operate in a similar space to the Group by 
providing capital and/or support services 
to early-stage businesses, and a wide 
variety of business models can be seen. 

Ten years of growth as a listed company

MARKET CAPITALISATION 

£112m

AIM admission

£335m

Official List admission

£898m

Date of report

2008 

2010 

2012 

2013 

2014 

Acquires 19% stake in 
Fusion IP plc

2009

Proximagen plc  
raises £50m

Oxford Nanopore Ltd 
raises £10m

Wins mandate to 
manage ‘North East 
Technology Fund’

Ilika plc floats on AIM

Tissue Regenix Group 
plc floats on AIM

2011 

Expands relationship 
with Oxford University 
via Technikos

Completes £55m 
fundraising

Retroscreen Virology 
Group plc floats on 
AIM

Trade sale of 
Proximagen plc for up 
to £357m

Revolymer plc floats 
on AIM

Signs agreement 
with University of 
Manchester; pilot 
deals in the US with 
Penn & Columbia

Investment in 
Cambridge Innovation 
Capital plc

AGM plc floats on AIM

Launch of IP Venture 
Fund II

Completes £100m 
fundraising

Acquisition of Fusion 
IP plc

07

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our Business & StrategyOur portfolio at a glance

Our portfolio: continuing to  
develop and mature

Healthcare

Number of companies

18 (2012: 17)

Fair value

Energy & Renewables

Chemicals & Materials

Number of companies

15  (2012: 14)

Fair value

Number of companies

16 (2012: 14)

Fair value

£175.8m  (2012: £107.3m)

£36.1m  (2012: £30.3m)

£32.7m  (2012: £18.0m)

 — Major contributors to significant net 
increase in fair value were Oxford 
Nanopore (£33.3m), Retroscreen 
(£16.1m) and Tissue Regenix (£9.4m)

 — Oxford Nanopore announced a 
heavily oversubscribed MinION 
Access Programme and a £40m gross 
financing

 — Retroscreen raised £25.5m gross new 
capital and announced that it expects 
to approximately double revenues to 
£27m in 2013

 — Tissue Regenix announced a positive 

trial of DermaPure™ for chronic wounds

Product pipeline
Incubation projects

 — Limited net fair value increase; 

primarily Ceres Power (£2.1m) and 
Getech (£3.3m)

 — Ceres Power announced Phil 

 — Major contributors to net fair value 
gain included Applied Graphene 
Materials plc’s AIM IPO and 
subsequent price increase (£12.2m)

Caldwell as CEO and a commercial 
and technical partnership with South 
Korea’s KD Navien

 — Revolymer announced nicotine gum 
developments but the departure of its 
CEO in early 2014

 — Getech highlighted increased 

revenues (£8.0m) and profits (£2.2m) 
for year to 31 July 2013

 — Xeros completed £10m gross placing 
to fund commercial and domestic 
laundry opportunity development

 — Modern Water increased its presence 

in China through a distribution 
agreement and strategic contracts

Seed businesses

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

08

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Business & StrategyIT & Communications

Biotech

Number of companies

11  (2012: 12)

Fair value

Number of companies

9 (2012: 8)

Fair value

Multiple Sectors

Number of companies

3 (2012: 2)

Fair value

£15.4m  (2012: £10.4m)

£6.1m (2012: £5.6m)

£19.8m  (2012: £10.2m)

 — Actual Experience (£3.3m) and Tracsis 
(£1.1m) contributed to modest overall 
net gain

 — Limited portfolio company holdings 
in biotech sector following £15.1m 
Proximagen cash exit in 2012

 — Tracsis acquired Sky High plc and saw 
a 25% revenue increase to £10.8m to 
31 July 2013

 — Subsidiary Modern Biosciences 

developing family of compounds 
acting against exciting novel 
immunology target

 — Balance of Fusion IP plc not owned 

by Group to be acquired via a 
recommended takeover, pending OFT 
clearance and court sanction

 — New strategic holding in Cambridge 
Innovation Capital plc with MoU to 
share co-investment opportunities

09

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our Business & StrategyStrategy

Our strategy: systematically  
building businesses

Our strategic aims

What we did in 2013

Identify
To build and maintain a 
pipeline of compelling 
intellectual property-
based opportunities

 — Provided initial capital to nine technology companies (2012: 11)

 — Expanded pipeline through commercialisation agreement 

with University of Manchester (including graphene projects 
in 2014)

 — Expanded pipeline through commercialisation agreements in 
US, with University of Pennsylvania and Columbia University

 — Strategic investment in CIC and MoU to share early-stage 

company opportunities

Develop
To develop intellectual 
property based 
opportunities into a 
diversified portfolio of 
robust businesses

 — Net portfolio fair value increased to £285.9m, a net fair value  

gain of £82.4m

 — Portfolio increased to 72 companies

 — Board representation on more than 75% of companies  

by number

 — IP Impact programmes run internally and externally

 — Continued to provide other spin-out support services 

including IP Exec, business support, corporate finance and 
legal advice to portfolio companies

Grow
To grow the value of 
our assets and those we 
manage on behalf of 
third parties

 — Net portfolio fair value gains of £82.4m

 — Deployed capital of £27.5m to portfolio (2012: £26.3m)

 — Portfolio stands at 72 companies with a combined total value 

in excess of £1.7bn

 — Raised £30m IP Venture Fund II, to invest alongside the 

Group

 — Total funds under management of approximately £100m

Deliver
To deliver attractive 
financial returns from  
our assets

 — Net portfolio fair value gains of £82.4m

 — Proceeds from sale of equity and debt of £5.5m

 — Strong share price performance in 2013 with an increase in 

excess of 40%

10

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Business & StrategyIP Group’s purpose is to systematically help create, build and 
support outstanding intellectual property-based businesses in 
order to provide attractive returns for our shareholders and other 
stakeholders. The key elements of our strategy are as follows:

Objectives for 2014

Link to KPIs

 — Maintain similar level of new opportunities

 — Number of new portfolio companies

 — Integrate Fusion IP’s partner university relationships into the Group

 — Cash, cash equivalents and deposits

 — Further expansion into the US via pilot projects – identify first US based 

 Read more on pages 30 and 31

incubation opportunities

 — Identify opportunities to deploy an increased level of capital into the Group’s 

biotech division

 — Complete Fusion acquisition, integrate staff into the Group and begin to deepen 

 — Purchase of equity and  

our sector expertise

debt investments

 — Seek to maintain approach of direct IP Group representation on spin-out 

 — Change in fair value of equity and 

company boards

debt investments 

 — Continue to develop and deploy IP Impact

 — Cash, cash equivalents and deposits

 — Continue to provide “add-on” services such as IP Exec, business support, 

 Read more on pages 30 and 31

corporate finance advice

 — £100m capital raising in early 2014 will facilitate increased rate of capital 

 — Total equity

deployed in 2014, primarily into maturing portfolio

 — Change in fair value of equity and 

 — Assist, directly or indirectly, portfolio companies to access public and private 

debt investments 

markets to raise development capital 

 — Continue to monitor opportunities for additional capital or funds under 

management

 — Cash, cash equivalents and deposits

 Read more on pages 30 and 31

 — Seek to continue net long-term increase in portfolio value and net assets

 — Total equity

 — Where appropriate, generate cash realisations from portfolio

 — Generate attractive performance in Group’s managed funds

 — Profit/(loss) attributable to  

equity holders

 — Proceeds from sale of  
equity investments

 — IP Group share price performance

 Read more on pages 30 and 31

11

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our Business & StrategyOperational review

A successful year:  
executing our  
core strategy

During 2013 the Group has continued to 
build on the strong foundations laid in 
previous years and has utilised its people 
and cash resources to continue to support 
the development of its portfolio. 

For the second successive year the Group deployed 
over £25m of balance sheet capital into its portfolio 
companies and saw the fair value of its portfolio 
increase significantly. The Group’s access to 
intellectual property opportunities in the UK was 
expanded through a new partnership with the 
University of Manchester and a strategic investment 
in Cambridge Innovation Capital plc, while the 
Group took its first measured steps internationally 
through two new pilot relationships with the 
University of Pennsylvania and Columbia University.

Alan Aubrey  Chief Executive Officer

Since the period end, in January 
2014, we were pleased to announce 
a recommended all-paper acquisition 
of Fusion IP plc, a business with which 
we have enjoyed a strong working 
relationship since taking a 20% stake in 
2009. The recommended acquisition 
is highly complementary to IP Group’s 
core business and will give the combined 
entity greater breadth of coverage, 
enabling the Group to access a wider 
pool of intellectual property as well as 
improve our service offering to existing 
and potential research institutions both in 
the UK and internationally. In addition, our 
shareholders gave a strong endorsement 
of our business model and progress to 
date through their support of an equity 
raise of £100m, before expenses, that will 
enable us to continue to back our most 
promising portfolio companies. Access to 
finance for our portfolio companies was 
further complemented in 2013 through 
the raising of a new £30m fund with  
the European Investment Fund (“EIF”),  
IP Venture Fund II, a successor to IP 
Venture Fund.

Throughout 2013, the Group continued to 
execute its core strategy of building high-
quality businesses based on intellectual 
property. This has resulted in the fair 
value of the Group’s portfolio increasing 
to £285.9m (2012: £181.8m) across 
72 companies, with many companies 
continuing to mature, increase revenues, 
and achieve commercial and technical 
milestones. Highlights included: Oxford 
Nanopore Technologies Limited 
(“Oxford Nanopore”) completing a 
£40m financing and launching a heavily 
oversubscribed access program to allow 
researchers to begin using its nanopore 
sequencing technology; Durham 
Graphene Sciences Limited rebranding 
to Applied Graphene Materials plc 

12

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceTestimonial: 
Business Building

“It is common for 
institutional investors 
to claim that they ‘add value’ to 
their portfolio companies. However 
IP Group has done exactly this, 
in a very fundamental and value 
accretive way since our early days. 
It is not unreasonable to say that 
the company would not be where 
it is today without their consistent 
support and guidance.” 

Dave Page, CEO   
Actual Experience plc

“IP Group has a strong sense of 
commitment to the business in 
which they invest, positioning 
themselves as partners in your 
company and are in it ‘for the long 
run’…They have stood shoulder to 
shoulder with us as we grew and 
matured, offering both financial and 
professional support at each stage 
of the company’s development.” 

Kym Denny, CEO   
Retroscreen Virology Group plc

(“Applied Graphene”) and completing an 
AIM market IPO and concurrent £11m 
placing; and Retroscreen Virology Group 
plc (“Retroscreen”) continuing to grow 
its revenues and guiding the market in 
December to expect FY2013 revenues 
in excess of £27m (almost double the 
£14m achieved in 2012). There were 
few significant reductions in fair value 
or write-offs within the portfolio. Further 
detailed analysis is provided in the 
portfolio review.

The Group’s active involvement in the 
development of its spin-out companies 
is an integral part of the implementation 
of its strategy. To that end, the Group has 
expanded IP Exec, the Group’s specialist 
in-house executive search function which 
assists portfolio companies in recruiting 
experienced and able leadership. In 
addition, following the completion of the 
acquisition of Fusion IP, its existing highly 
skilled team will augment the Group’s 
core business.

As noted opposite, in addition to 
increasing its access to UK university-
produced research through its 
relationships with the University of 
Manchester and CIC, the Group 
announced in December that it had 
signed IP commercialisation agreements 
with the University of Pennsylvania, the 
UPstart company formation programme 
run by its Center for Technology Transfer, 
and with Columbia Technology Ventures, 
the technology transfer office of 
Columbia University. These partnerships, 
which have an initial pilot phase of 18 
months, will focus on identifying early-
stage, proof of principle opportunities 
based on intellectual property developed 
at those universities. The Group will 
seek to identify its first opportunities for 
development from these universities 
during the course of 2014.

In order to support the current portfolio 
as well as future spin-outs from its 
university partners, the Group recognises 
the importance of being able to provide 
long-term ‘patient’ capital to its portfolio 
companies. The successful completion 
of the Group’s £100m placing in February 
2014 will ensure that the Group has 
the ability to continue to back its most 
promising portfolio companies with 
both capital and people. Top Technology 
Ventures Limited (“TTV”), the Group’s 

FCA-regulated subsidiary, now manages 
three venture capital funds with total 
assets under management now in excess 
of £100m. IPVFII was established in May 
2013 in partnership with the EIF, one of 
the leading venture capital investors in 
Europe. The fund comprises £30m of 
capital with a £20m contribution from 
the EIF and a £10m contribution from the 
Group. NETF, now entering its fifth year 
of investing, has to date provided capital 
to 55 developing technology companies 
in north-east England. Finally, IPVF, whose 
investing period ended in 2012, continues 
to deploy its remaining capital to support 
its existing portfolio. 

Outlook
Whilst macroeconomic sentiment in the 
UK is improving, funding for higher risk, 
early-stage businesses continues to be 
constrained and trading circumstances 
for many small businesses remain 
difficult. Nonetheless, the Directors 
believe that the UK continues to produce 
a wealth of potentially world-class IP 
from its universities and other research 
intensive institutions and consider that the 
Group has an increasingly strengthened 
position given its track record, strong 
cash position and available funds under 
management.

The Group continues to expand its 
access to leading scientific innovation, 
both in the UK and abroad, by broadening 
and deepening its arrangements with 
its existing university partners and other 
research intensive institutions, and by 
entering into collaborations with new 
partners. These arrangements continue 
to provide opportunities for the Group to 
back early-stage projects and companies 
based on potentially high-impact 
technologies. The Board is confident 
that this flow of opportunities, coupled 
with the Group’s increased ability to 
invest larger sums more frequently in its 
portfolio companies as a result of the 
Capital Raising, will continue to drive the 
Group’s growth. The Board is excited at 
the prospect of the acquisition of Fusion 
IP plc which it considers represents an 
opportunity to create a stronger UK 
commercialisation company with greater 
critical mass. Accordingly, the Board 
remains confident in the prospects for the 
Group.

13

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review

Our portfolio: continuing to 
develop and mature

The Group’s ten largest portfolio 
companies account for almost 79% of the 
total portfolio value (2012: 76%)

Portfolio by  
fair value (£m)

Healthcare

Energy & Renewables

Chemicals & Materials

IT & Communications

Biotech

Multiple sectors

Portfolio by  
number

Healthcare

Energy & Renewables

Chemicals & Materials

IT & Communications

Biotech

Multiple sectors

Portfolio by  
stage

Incubation opportunities

20

Seed businesses

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

6.1

15.4

19.8

32.7

36.1

175.8

3

9

11

16

18

15

8

18

26

14

Overview
At 31 December 2013 the value of the 
Group’s portfolio had increased to 
£285.9m, from £181.8m in 2012, as a 
result of the net investment and fair value 
movements set out below. The portfolio 
comprised holdings in 72 companies, 
compared with 67 at 31 December 2012. 

During the year to 31 December 2013, 
the Group provided pre-seed, seed and 
post-seed capital totalling approximately 
£27.5m to its portfolio companies, 
including a £5m investment into 
Cambridge Innovation Capital plc. This 
rate of deployment is largely consistent 
with the £26.3m provided in 2012 and 
is in line with commitments made at 
the time of the Group’s 2011 placing. 
The directors believe that the Group’s 
ability to utilise its increased capital to 
maintain its equity interest in its most 
promising companies has contributed to 
the significant fair value increase in the 
portfolio during the year of £82.4m  
(2012: £38.0m). 

The Group has broadly maintained 
the level of capital deployed into new 
spin-out opportunities, with initial capital 
being deployed by the Group into nine 
companies during the year (2012: 11) 
and the Group received stakes in two 
additional companies. One company was 
sold during the period, whilst a further 
five companies were closed or fully 
provided against with a total historic cost 
of £11.2m. The total cost of all closed 
or fully provided companies now stands 
at approximately £17m, representing 
approximately 14% of the total capital 
deployed to date by the Group into its 
portfolio.

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceOverview

Fair value of portfolio

£285.9m (2012: £181.8m)

Investment in portfolio

£27.5m (2012: £26.3m)

Number of portfolio companies

72 (2012: 67)

Realisations from portfolio

£5.5m  (2012: £16.7m)

Number of new portfolio companies

9  (2012: 11)

The Group’s holdings in companies 
quoted on either AIM or ISDX saw a net 
unrealised fair value increase of £46.1m 
while the Group’s holdings in unquoted 
companies experienced a net fair value 
increase of £36.3m. The Group believes 
that the increasing maturity and technical 
and commercial progress of many of 
its underlying portfolio businesses, both 
quoted and unquoted, contributed to the 
significant increases in fair value during 
the year. The share price performance of 
the Group’s quoted portfolio companies 
has continued to be positive during 
the first two months of 2014, with the 
portfolio having seen a £23.6m net 
unrealised fair value increase from the 
year end to 28 February 2014.

15

The Group’s ten largest portfolio 
companies by value, accounting for 
almost 79% of the total portfolio value 
(2012: 76%), have seen significant 
developments during the year. Applied 
Graphene Materials plc, a spin-out from 
Durham University which has developed 
a proprietary process for the manufacture 
of high purity graphene nanoplatelets, 
completed an AIM market IPO and 
concurrent £11m placing to scale up 
capacity of its plant to eight tonnes per 
annum over the next 18 months, for 
investment in technical and business 
development, commercial partnerships 
and to extend the applications capability.

During the year, cash proceeds from 
the realisation of investments decreased 
to £5.5m (2012: £16.7m). The proceeds 
predominantly arose from partial exits 
of the Group’s holdings in AIM-quoted 
Tracsis plc and Velocys plc, whilst the 
prior year was primarily driven by the 
disposal of Proximagen plc for £15.4m.

Performance summary
A summary of the gains and losses across 
the portfolio is as follows: 

Unrealised gains on 
the revaluation of 
investments

Unrealised losses on 
the revaluation of 
investments

2013
 £m

2012 
£m

90.3

64.5

(7.9)

(26.5)

Net fair value gains

82.4

38.0

(Loss)/profit on 
disposals of equity 
investments

Change in fair value 
of Limited Partnership 
interests

Net portfolio gains

(0.2)

11.8

0.8

83.0

0.4

50.2

The most significant contributors to 
unrealised gains on the revaluation of 
investments comprised Oxford Nanopore 
(£33.3m), Retroscreen (£16.1m) and 
Applied Graphene (£12.2m). The major 
contributors to the unrealised losses 
on the revaluation of investments were 
Modern Water (£1.6m), Oxford Advanced 
Surfaces (£1.5m) and Encos (£1.1m). 

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

Investments and realisations
As expected, the Group’s rate of capital 
deployment remained consistent during 
2013, with a total of £27.5m being 
deployed across 44 new and existing 
projects (2012: £26.3m; 43 projects), as 
follows: 
Cash investment analysis 
by company stage

2013
 £m

2012
 £m

Incubation 
opportunities

Seed businesses

Post-seed private 
businesses

Post-seed quoted 
businesses

Total

0.2

4.2

0.5

4.2

13.7

13.1

9.4

27.5

8.5

26.3

Proceeds from sales 
of equity investments

5.5

16.7

Incubation opportunities comprise 
businesses or pre-incorporation projects 
that are generally at a very early stage 
of development. Opportunities at this 
stage usually involve capital of less than 
£150,000 from IP Group, predominantly 
allowing for proof of concept work 
to be carried out. Incubation projects 
generally have a duration of nine to 
eighteen months, following which 
the opportunity is progressed to seed 
financing, terminated or retained at 
the pre-seed stage for a further period 
to allow additional proof of concept 
work to be carried out. Seed businesses 
are those that have typically received 
financing of up to £1m in total, primarily 
from IP Group, in order to continue to 
progress towards agreed commercial and 
technology milestones and to enable the 
recruitment of management teams and 
early commercial engagement. 

16

Post-seed businesses are those that have 
received some level of further funding 
from co-investors external to IP Group, 
with total funding received generally in 
excess of £1m. Although each business 
can vary significantly in its rate and 
manner of development, such additional 
funding is generally used to progress 
towards key milestones and commercial 
validation, to build senior level capability 
in the business and to attract experienced 
non-executive directors to their boards. 
This category is further broken down into 
post-seed private and post-seed quoted 
companies. Post-seed quoted companies 
consist of companies quoted on either 
AIM or the ISDX markets.

The Group has continued to mature its 
post-seed businesses with a number 
announcing further financings supported 
by the Group and/or IPVF, the dedicated 
follow-on venture capital fund managed 
by the Group. IPVF invested a total of 
£1.4m into Group portfolio businesses 
during the year (2012: £3.0m). There is 
approximately £2.6m further to invest into 
the existing portfolio from this fund. 

The Group raised IP Venture Fund II, a 
£30 million venture capital fund, in May 
2013 in partnership with the European 
Investment Fund. IP Venture Fund II is 
a successor fund to IP Venture Fund 
and will invest alongside the Group 
in new spin-out companies from IP 
Group’s university partnerships and other 
collaborations, from incubation stage 
through seed and post-seed stage, with 
an investment ratio of 30:70 (IP Venture 
Fund II: IP Group). 

The Group’s pipeline of commercialisable 
intellectual property opportunities 
remains strong. Eight opportunities 
received initial incubation or seed funding 
during the year (2012: eight), two existing 
incubation projects progressed to seed 
stage (2012: two), with a further one 
developing business receiving capital 
from the Group for the first time.

The eight new opportunities included: 

•	 Quantum Imaging Limited (University 

of Leeds): Quantum Imaging is 
developing an imaging device that is 
portable, passive, and can be deployed 
in a bedside setting. The device can 
rapidly triage patients presenting 
with chest pains to the emergency 
department. These patients represent 
a major time and cost burden on 
global healthcare systems offering 
a significant addressable market 
opportunity;

•	 Fault Current Limited (University of 
Cardiff): Fault Current has devised 
a unique magnetic fault current 
limiter design that protects utility 
electrical distribution networks from 
unanticipated power surges;

•	 Ubiquigent Limited (University of 

Dundee): Ubiquigent is a specialist 
developer and supplier of high quality 
reagents, kits and drug discovery assay 
development and compound profiling 
services with a focus on ubiquitin, 
ubiquitin-like, and integrated signalling 
systems; and

•	

Ionix Advanced Technologies Limited 
(University of Leeds): Ionix develops 
high performance piezoelectric 
materials that can operate in high-
temperature, high-work environments.

The average level of capital deployed 
per company increased slightly from 
£610,000 to £620,000 in 2013. Excluding 
the Group’s participation in Oxford 
Nanopore’s 2012 and 2013 financing 
rounds, the average investment per 
company increased to £530,000 from 
£470,000 in 2012. This trend is expected 
to broadly continue in the future.

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceThe Group’s pipeline remains strong.  
Eight opportunities received initial  
incubation or seed funding  
during the year (2012: 8)

Portfolio analysis — by stage of company maturity
At 31 December 2013, the Group’s portfolio fair value of £285.9m was distributed across stages of company maturity as follows:

Company stage

Incubation opportunities

Seed businesses

Post-seed private businesses

Post-seed quoted businesses

All portfolio businesses

As at 31 December 2013

As at 31 December 2012

Fair value
£m

0.1

11.3

139.4

135.1

285.9

%

—

4%

49%

47%

100%

Number

8

20

26

18

72

%

11%

28%

36%

25%

100%

Fair value
£m

0.5

9.9

86.8

84.6

181.8

%

—

5%

48%

47%

100%

Number

8

17

26

16

67

%

12%

25%

39%

24%

100%

Of the 72 companies in the Group’s portfolio, 79% (2012: 76%) of the fair value resides in the ten most valuable companies and the 
Group’s holdings in these businesses are valued at a total of £225.2m (2012: £138.2m). 

Portfolio analysis — by sector
The Group funds spin-out companies based on a wide variety of innovative and potentially disruptive commercialisable intellectual 
property emerging from leading research intensive institutions and does not limit itself to funding companies from particular areas of 
science. For reporting purposes only, the Group categorises its portfolio companies into five broad “technology” sectors, as depicted 
in the following table:

Sector

Healthcare

Energy & Renewables

Chemicals & Materials

IT & Communications

Biotech

Multiple sectors 

As at 31 December 2013

As at 31 December 2012

Fair value
£m

%

Number

175.8 

36.1

32.7 

15.4 

6.1 

19.8

62%

13%

11%

5%

2%

7%

285.9

100%

18

15

16

11

9

3

72

%

25%

21%

22%

15%

13%

4%

100%

Fair value
£m

%

Number

107.3 

31.0

18.0 

9.7 

5.6 

10.2

181.8

59%

17%

10%

5%

3%

6%

100%

17

14

14

12

8

2

67

%

25%

21%

21%

18%

12%

3%

100%

As can be seen from the table, the Group’s portfolio by number of companies is well diversified across five main sectors. By fair 
value, however, the portfolio is currently more concentrated in the healthcare sector, largely as a result of the relative valuation of the 
Group’s holding in Oxford Nanopore, Retroscreen and Tissue Regenix Group plc. 

A more detailed analysis of each sector is set out on the following pages.

17

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

Healthcare

The Group’s portfolio of healthcare, or 
“medtech”, companies saw the most 
significant increase in fair value during 
the period. The major contributors to this 
increase were Oxford Nanopore (£33.3m) 
as a result of its further £40m fundraising 
being completed at a premium to its 
previous financing round, Retroscreen 
(£16.1m) which experienced strong share 
price performance following its £25.5m 
placing and Tissue Regenix Group plc 
(£9.4m) whose share price performed 
positively during the year following 
announcement of the publication of full 
trial results detailing the effectiveness 
of DermaPure™ in healing treatment-
resistant chronic wounds and the 
production of dCELL® dermis in the 
United States. 

In January 2014, Oxford Nanopore 
Technologies Limited (“Oxford 
Nanopore”), a spin-out company from 
the University of Oxford that specialises 
in nanopore-based electronic molecular 
analysis systems, announced that its 
MinION Access Programme (“MAP”) 
had been “heavily oversubscribed” 
following its launch in November. 
The MAP is a substantial but initially 
controlled programme designed to 
give life science researchers access to 
nanopore sequencing technology at no 
risk and minimal cost. The programme 
will be conducted in cycles with the 
first cycle taking place over a six week 
period comprising “a configuration 
phase (installation of hardware and 
software), burn-in phase (test experiments 

using control samples provided by 
Oxford Nanopore) and the user’s own 
experiments”. In October 2013, Oxford 
Nanopore announced it had raised £40m 
in new funding via a private placement of 
ordinary shares, bringing the total funds 
raised by Oxford Nanopore since its 
foundation to £145m. 

Retroscreen Virology Group plc 
(“Retroscreen”), a spin-out from Queen 
Mary University of London, that has 
pioneered the commercialisation of the 
Viral Challenge Model which enables 
research into viral infection and enables 
pharmaceutical companies to accelerate 
and reduce the cost of bringing antiviral 
therapeutics and vaccines to market, 
announced in July that had it raised 
£25.5m before expenses, with the 

Group stake
at 31 Dec

2013(i)
%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2012
£m

Year to 31 December 2013

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

19.6%

66.5

4.5 

33.3 

104.3

1.1

—

0.9

1.9

8.4

16.1

29.6

9.4

1.4

(0.1)

60.1

20.7

12.2

9.0

175.8

Company name

Description

Oxford Nanopore  
Technologies Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Single-molecule detection. 1st 
application in 3rd generation DNA 
sequencing (“$1000 genome”)

Viral challenge and ‘virometrics’ 
specialist (“conquering viral disease”)

Regenerative dCELL® soft tissue body 
parts

18.3%

12.4

13.8%

11.3

Avacta Group plc

Other companies

Total

Reagents, arrays and instruments for 
human and animal healthcare

27.6%

9.9

7.2

107.3

(i) 

Stake represents undiluted beneficial equity interest excluding debt.

18

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceNumber of companies

18 (2012: 17)

Fair value

£175.8m (2012: £107.3m)

Case study: Healthcare
Oxehealth
Stage: Seed

Group, together with its managed funds, 
contributing £1.5m of the placing. In 
December, Retroscreen announced 
that it expects to report revenues for 
the year ended 31 December 2013 
in excess of £27.0m (31 December 
2012: £14.4m), significantly ahead of 
market expectations. The company also 
continues to achieve improvements to 
gross margin and profitability. 

Avacta Group plc (“Avacta”), which 
develops reagents, arrays and instruments 
for human and animal healthcare, 
announced in July 2013 that it had 
raised gross proceeds of £4.7m primarily 
to develop its Affimer technology, of 
which the Group, together with its 
managed funds, contributed £1.0m. 
Avacta subsequently announced its first 
licence deal for Affimers with Blueberry 
Therapeutics, a private UK biotechnology 
company.

Monitoring ‘vital signs’ (heart rate etc.) remotely 
Oxehealth is a software developer spun out from the University of Oxford’s 
Institute of Biomedical Engineering. Its technology enables a digital camera, 
tablet or phone to monitor the vital signs (heart rate, respiratory rate and 
oxygen saturation) of an individual, without the need for physical contact or 
expensive proprietary equipment. Oxehealth recently appointed Warren East, 
the former ARM CEO, board member of Rolls Royce, De La Rue, Dyson and 
BT, to its Advisory Board.

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

19

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

Energy & Renewables

Companies in the Energy & Renewables 
sector also saw an increase in fair value 
during the period of £4.0m. The major 
contributors to this increase were Getech 
Group plc (£3.3m) and Ceres Power 
Holdings plc (£2.1m) whose respective 
share prices performed positively during 
the year. This increase was partially offset 
by a decrease in Modern Water plc’s 
share price (£1.6m). 

In March 2013, Ceres Power Holdings plc 
(“Ceres”), a developer of clean, efficient, 
low-cost fuel cell technology, raised 
gross proceeds of £9.7m, of which the 

Group provided £2.0m. In July, assisted 
by IP Exec, Ceres appointed Phil Caldwell, 
formerly Corporate Development 
Director at PEM fuel cell developer 
Intelligent Energy Limited, as its new 
CEO. Shortly thereafter, the company 
announced a commercial and technical 
partnership with KD Navien, the dominant 
boiler manufacturer in South Korea. In 
late November, the company presented 
significant technical progress of its fuel 
cell technology at the Okinawa Fuel Cell 
Conference in Japan. Two technical 
papers were published which explained 
the performance advances demonstrated 

by the low cost Ceres’ Steel Cell over 
the past year, particularly in relation to 
robustness, efficiency and durability.

Modern Water plc (“Modern Water”), a 
company that develops leading water 
technologies focused on addressing the 
scarcity of fresh water and the monitoring 
of water quality, announced in March 
2013 that it had raised gross proceeds of 
£10.0m, including £1.7m from the Group. 
Modern Water’s share performance in 
the year was disappointing despite the 
company releasing improved interim 
results in September and announcing 

Company name

Description

Ceres Power Holdings plc 

Modern Water plc

Getech Group plc

CH4E Limited

Rock Deformation  
Research Limited

Ceramic fuel cell technology for 
distributed generation

Technologies to address the world’s 
water crisis

Gravitational and magnetic data 
services for the oil, gas and mining 
industries

Small to medium scale anaerobic 
digesters

Services and tools to examine impact 
of faults and other structures on 
hydrocarbon reserves

Velocys plc (previously Oxford 
Catalysts Group plc)

Speciality catalysts for the generation 
of clean fuels

Other companies

Total

(i) 

Stake represents undiluted beneficial equity interest excluding debt.

Group stake 
at 31 Dec
2013(i)
%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2012
£m

Year to 31 December 2013

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

24.7%

20.0%

23.4%

41.2%

21.4%

0.7%

6.2

6.7

3.1

0.6

1.7

6.3

5.7

30.3

2.0

1.7

—

1.3

—

(5.1)

1.9

1.8

2.1

10.3

(1.6) 

6.8

3.3

1.0

0.5

—

(1.3)

4.0

6.4

2.9

2.2

1.2

6.3

36.1

20

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Performancethe signing of an exclusive distribution 
agreement, opening a new office and 
signing a number of new strategic 
contracts in China. 

Getech Group plc (“Getech”), the 
geoscience services business specialising 
in the provision of data, studies and 
services to the oil, gas and mining 
exploration sectors, announced its results 
for the twelve months ended 31 July 
2013 in October. The highlights included 
revenue for the year increasing by 25% 
to £8.0m (2012: £6.4m) and profit before 
tax increasing by 83% to £2.2m (2012: 
£1.2m). Following on from this significant 
improvement in financial performance, 
the company’s share price increased 
105% during 2013, with the fair value 
of the Group’s holding in the company 
increasing £3.3m. Getech’s share price 
has experienced some downward 
pressure in early 2014 following a H1 
trading update indicating a reduction in 
profit compared to the prior half year. 

Number of companies

15 (2012: 14)

Fair value

£36.1m (2012: £30.3m)

Case study: Energy & Renewables
Modern Water
Stage: Post-seed quoted

Technologies for the production of fresh water and  
monitoring of water quality
Modern Water supplies world-leading technologies for the production of fresh 
water and monitoring of water quality and recently announced key contracts 
during a UK Government trade mission to China, led by the UK Prime Minister, 
David Cameron. Mr Cameron said: “Modern Water is an excellent example 
of a small British business taking world-leading technology to China and 
securing significant deals - all part of Britain succeeding in the global race.”

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

21

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

Chemicals & Materials

The unrealised fair value gain seen by 
the Chemicals & Materials portfolio 
was largely as a result of an increase in 
Applied Graphene’s share price since its 
admission to AIM and Xeros Limited’s 
further £10.0m fundraising being 
completed at a premium to its previous 
financing round. 

Applied Graphene Materials plc 
(“Applied Graphene”), a spin-out 
from Durham University which has 
developed a proprietary process for the 
manufacture of high purity graphene 
nanoplatelets, completed its AIM IPO 
and £11.0m placing in November. 
Applied Graphene will utilise the funding 

to scale up production and accelerate 
its collaboration agreements with nine 
commercial partners, which range 
from feasibility assessments to detailed 
research investigating uses of graphene in 
various application areas.

Revolymer plc (“Revolymer”), a University 
of Bristol spin-out that has developed 
a broad portfolio of polymer-based IP 
which it is now applying to improve the 
performance of a variety of consumer 
products, announced in November 
2013 that it had filed for marketing 
authorisation in Europe of its proprietary 
nicotine gum products by submitting an 
application to the MHRA. If approved, this 

will permit the marketing of Revolymer’s 
2mg and 4mg strength nicotine gum in 
the UK, Ireland, Poland and Spain. On  
27 January 2014, the company 
announced the departure of its CEO 
and is currently taking steps to identify a 
successor.

In March 2013, Xeros Limited (“Xeros”), the 
developer of a patented polymer bead 
cleaning system, successfully completed 
a £10.0m fundraising from new and 
existing investors, including £1.3m from 
the Group and its managed funds. The 
funding is being used to accelerate 
the roll-out of the Xeros commercial 
laundry cleaning system and to finalise 

Company name

Description

Applied Graphene Materials plc

Producer of speciality  
graphene materials 

Revolymer plc

Xeros Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Other companies

Total

Novel polymers, e.g. “removable 
chewing gum”

“Virtually waterless” washing 
machines

Low temperature carbon  
nanotube growth

(i) 

Stake represents undiluted beneficial equity interest excluding debt.

Group stake 
at 31 Dec
2013(i)
%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2012
£m

Year to 31 December 2013

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

20.4%

10.4%

14.6%

21.0%

0.7

4.0

1.4

2.3

9.6

18.0

2.0

—

0.9

—

0.9

3.8

12.2

14.9

(0.1)

0.9

—

(2.1)

10.9

3.9

3.2

2.3

8.4

32.7

22

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our Performancethe development of a household 
system as an alternative to conventional 
domestic washing machines. In May 
2013, Xeros announced that it had 
partnered with the chemical company 
BASF to jointly develop polymer beads 
based on engineering plastics that will 
increase the cleaning power in laundry 
applications. This long-term agreement 
reflects the mutual commitment of 
the two companies to maximise the 
commercialisation of the Xeros cleaning 
system and protect the environment 
by conserving water and energy. In 
February 2014, Xeros announced its 
intention to float on the AIM market 
and raise funds to allow it to accelerate 
roll-out in commercial laundry and to 
fund the research and development 
process through to commercialisation in 
other identified applications, not least in 
domestic laundry.

Number of companies

16  (2012: 14)

Fair value

£32.7m  (2012: £18.0m)

Case study: Chemicals & Materials
Applied Graphene Materials
Stage: Post-seed quoted

Cutting edge technology in the developing graphene market
Applied Graphene Materials (“AGM”) is a spin-out from Durham University 
which has developed a proprietary process for the manufacture of high purity 
graphene nanoplatelets. Since its isolation in 2004, graphene has attracted 
significant interest and been dubbed ‘the wonder material’ given its unsurpassed 
electrical, thermal and mechanical properties. AGM listed on the AIM market of 
the London Stock Exchange in November 2013, having raised £11m.

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

23

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

IT & Communications

At 31 December 2013, the Group’s 
portfolio of holdings in IT & 
Communications companies was valued 
at £15.4m (2012: £10.4m) and recorded 
a fair value gain of £4.2m (2012: £2.5m), 
the majority of which was due to Actual 
Experience plc’s fundraising being 
completed at a premium to its previous 
financing round and the performance of 
Tracsis plc’s share price. 

Tracsis plc (“Tracsis”), a leading 
provider of operational planning 
software to passenger transport 
industries, announced in March 2013 a 
recommended cash offer for the entire 
issued share capital of AIM-quoted Sky 
High plc, the largest provider of traffic 
analysis and surveys within the UK, and in 
April won Small Cap Company of the Year 
at the 2013 Small Cap Awards. In October 
2013, Tracsis released its final results for 
the year ended 31 July 2013, highlighting 
increases in revenues of 25% to £10.8m 

(2012: £8.7m), an expanded geographic 
footprint and the successful launch of 
new software products. 

In November 2013, Actual Experience 
plc (“Actual Experience”), a spin-out 
from Queen Mary London, successfully 
completed a £4m financing round. Funds 
raised will be used to support Actual 
Experience’s continued expansion and 
internationalisation, increase resource 
dedicated to supporting channel partners 
and further improve its capacity to 

Group stake 
at 31 Dec
2013(i)
%

10.9%

30.1%

Resource optimisation software for 
the transport industry

Optimising the human experience of 
networked applications

Digital preservation and management

45.3%

Company name

Description

Tracsis plc

Actual Experience plc(ii)

Arkivum Limited

Other companies

Total

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2012
£m

Year to 31 December 2013

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value  
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

5.0

1.2

1.9

2.3

10.4

(0.6)

1.1 

0.2

0.1

1.1

0.8

3.3

—

(0.2)

4.2

5.5

4.7

2.0

3.2

15.4

(i) 

Stake represents undiluted beneficial equity interest excluding debt.

(ii)  Actual Experience Limited prior to its AIM IPO on 13 February 2014.

24

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceNumber of companies

11  (2012: 12)

Fair value

£15.4m  (2012: £10.4m)

Case study: IT & Communications
Actual Experience
Stage: Post-seed private business

service its blue chip customer base, 
which currently includes Accenture (UK) 
Limited, Cisco systems Inc., Deutsche 
Post AG and Verizon Business Inc. 
Actual Experience Analytics are used 
by businesses to quantify and improve 
the actual ‘human experience’ of key 
IT applications for their customers 
and users. Following the period end in 
February 2014, Actual Experience’s shares 
were admitted to trading on AIM, with 
strong share price performance since 
listing resulting in a fair value increase in 
the Group’s holding as at 28 February 
2014 of £11.6m.

Improving the actual computing experience for end users
Actual Experience’s technology enables the measurement of the digital 
world as users experience it, enabling customers to measure and improve 
the performance of the business applications that they provide to their staff 
and their own clients, reducing costs while improving the experience of the 
user. A spin-out from Queen Mary University of London, shares in Actual 
Experience listed on the AIM market of the London Stock Exchange in 
February, valuing it at £15.6m at the introduction price.

 Read more online at www.ipgroupplc.com/portfolio

25

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformancePortfolio review
continued

Biotech

The fair value of the Group’s holdings 
in Biotech companies increased slightly 
during the year largely as a result of an 
increase in the share price of Synairgen 
and the receipt of shares in Summit 
Corporation plc worth approximately 
£0.5m as a result of the Group’s 
contract with the University of Oxford’s 
Department of Chemistry. 

Two businesses in this sector were 
fully provided against during the year. 
Pharminox, which had a fair value 
of £0.5m at 31 December 2012, was 
revalued to £nil following the cessation 
of operations and the commencement of 
a sale process for its intellectual property 
to seek to realise any residual value. 
This followed the last of Pharminox’s 
drug candidates having not received 
sufficiently positive pre-clinical data 
during the year to progress further. While 
the Group had only committed £1.0m of 
capital since Pharminox’s 2002 spin-out 
from Oxford’s Department of Chemistry, 
the Group has provided significant input 

Number of companies

9 (2012: 8)

Fair value

£6.1m (2012: £5.6m)

target that the Group believes is one 
of the most exciting emerging targets 
in immunology and has already been 
the focus of several papers published in 
Nature. Currently, the Group believes that 
MBS has the only known ligands against 
these targets. MBS expects to take its lead 
candidate into the clinic in 2014. MBS has 
also identified ways to use its expertise in 
the novel target biology to pursue other 
members of this family of compounds, 
each of which has a differing role in 
various inflammatory diseases. As MBS is 
currently consolidated into the Group’s 
results, it is not attributed any value in the 
Group’s portfolio.

into the company over that time and it 
is therefore a disappointing outcome. 
Photopharmica Limited, which was 
restructured by the Group in 2012 after 
an unsuccessful attempt by the company 
to partner its lead photodynamic therapy 
programme following positive Phase 
IIb data, was also fair valued at £nil at 
31 December 2013 (2012: £0.2m). The 
Group continues to seek a purchaser 
of Photopharmica Limited’s intellectual 
property and clinical trial data.

Modern Biosciences plc (“MBS”), a 
subsidiary company of the Group that 
in-licenses and develops intellectual 
property relating to new therapeutic 
compounds using a virtual drug-discovery 
model, saw more positive developments. 
Since 2006, MBS has been developing a 
family of compounds that act via a novel 

Company name

Synairgen plc

Description

Respiratory diseases

Karus Therapeutics Limited

Inflammatory disease and cancer

Summit Corporation plc

Duchenne Muscular Dystrophy

Other companies

Total

(i) 

Stake represents undiluted beneficial equity interest excluding debt.

Group stake 
at 31 Dec
2013(i)
%

10.8%

8.6%

<1%

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2012
£m

Year to 31 December 2013

Net 
investment/ 
(divestment)
£m

Fair value 
movement
£m

Fair value 
of Group 
holding at 
31 Dec 
2013
£m

3.7

0.9

—

1.0

5.6

—

—

—

0.3

0.3

0.6

—

0.5

(0.9)

0.2

4.3

0.9

0.5

0.4

6.1

26

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceFinancial review

A successful year: the value 
of the Group’s holdings 
in portfolio companies 
increased to £285.9m

For the year to 31 December 2013, the 
Group achieved a profit after tax of £72.6m, 
compared to a profit of £40.7m in 2012.  

This result includes a £5.0m reduction in the fair 
value of the Group’s contract with the University of 
Oxford’s Department of Chemistry (2012: £6.0m 
reduction). Excluding this non-cash fair value 
reduction, the Group recorded an adjusted profit 
of £77.6m compared to £46.7m in 2012, largely 
reflecting significantly higher net portfolio gains in 
the year.

Greg Smith  Chief Financial Officer

Statement of  
comprehensive income
A summary analysis of the Group’s 
financial performance is provided below:
2012
 £m

2013
 £m

Net portfolio gains

Other income

83.0

2.4

50.2

2.3

Change in fair value  
of Oxford Equity 
Rights asset

Administrative 
expenses – Modern 
Biosciences

Administrative 
expenses – all other 
businesses

Finance income

Profit and total 
comprehensive 
income for the year

(5.0)

(6.0)

(0.5)

(0.5)

(7.7)

0.4

(6.2)

0.9

72.6

40.7

Net portfolio gains consist primarily of 
realised and unrealised fair value gains 
and losses from the Group’s equity and 
debt holdings in spin-out businesses as 
well as changes in the fair value of its 
limited and limited liability partnership 
interests. A detailed analysis of fair 
value gains and losses is provided in the 
Portfolio review on pages 14 to 26. 

27

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformanceFinancial review
continued

Testimonial:
Capital

“IP Group has great 
links to the City. They 
know the small cap investment 
community and have put us in 
touch with various funds who are 
now investors. As a shareholder 
themselves, they have been very 
supportive and patient, following 
their money several times. The IP 
Group team genuinely understands 
how a real trading business works 
which is markedly different from 
other small cap funds.”  

John McArthur, CEO   
Tracsis plc

Other income for the year increased 
slightly to £2.4m (2012: £2.3m) as an 
increase in dividend income from Getech 
and Tracsis was largely offset by a lower 
level of venture capital fund management 
fees. This reduction occurred as IP Venture 
Fund continued in its post “investment 
period” run-off. However, this too was 
offset by the Group raising a successor 
fund, IP Venture Fund II, in May 2013. The 
Group continues to receive management 
fees and has the potential to generate 
performance fees from successful 
investment performance of both IP 
Venture Fund and the NETF, whose 
“investment period” is currently anticipated 
to continue until the end of 2014.

The Group continued to allocate limited 
capital to the evaluation and development 
of certain early-stage therapeutic 
programmes, including through its 
subsidiary Modern Biosciences plc 
(“MBS”). These development costs were 
expensed to the income statement as 
they were incurred. In November 2012, 
the Group announced that MBS had been 
awarded a grant of up to £1.6m by the UK 
Government-backed Biomedical Catalyst. 
The award is providing support for MBS’s 
lead anti-inflammatory programme, 
OsteoRx. The Group intends to continue 
developing a small number of early-stage 
therapeutic assets.

28

The Group’s administrative expenses, 
excluding those relating to MBS, 
increased during the period to £7.7m 
(2012: £6.2m), predominantly due to 
higher staff costs, and included an 
IFRS 2 share-based payments charge 
totalling £0.9m (2012: £0.8m) relating to 
the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan 
awards. This non-cash charge reflects 
the fair value of services received from 
employees, measured by reference to the 
fair value of the share-based payments at 
the date of award, but has no net impact 
on the Group’s total equity or “net assets”. 
In April 2013, the 2010 LTIP awards 
partially vested with 9,495,195 shares, 
representing 81% of the original award, 
being issued to the relevant members 
of the Company’s staff as a result of the 
Group’s strong three-year share price 
performance and an increase in “hard” 
net assets. Further detail is included in 
the Directors’ Remuneration Report on 
pages 53 to 70. The 2011 and 2012 LTIP 
awards are subject to vesting conditions 
until 2014 and 2015 and charges 
relating to these awards will continue 
to be recognised in the statement of 
comprehensive income until this time. 
The 2011 LTIP award will ordinarily vest 
on or after 31 March 2014 and, based on 
the results presented in this report, 100% 
of the 2011 awards are anticipated to vest 
during 2014.

As a result of the Group’s decreased 
average cash balances during the year, 
the Group’s interest receivable during the 
period fell to £0.4m (2012: £0.9m). It is 
expected that the Group’s future finance 
income will continue to fluctuate broadly 
in line with cash held on balance sheet 
and future interest rate changes.

Statement of financial position
The Group ended the period with net 
assets attributable to shareholders of 
£337.0m, representing an increase of 
£73.9m from the position at 1 January 
2013 (£263.1m). As described above, 
the most significant contributor to 
the increase in net assets during the 
period was the performance of the 
Group’s portfolio of holdings in spin-
out companies. “Hard” net assets, i.e. 
those excluding intangible assets and 
the Oxford Equity Rights asset, totalled 
£315.5m at 31 December 2013 (2012: 
£236.6m).

The Group finished 2013 with cash and 
deposits of £24.1m (2012: £47.9m) and 
a diversified portfolio of equity and debt 
investments in 72 private and publicly 
listed technology companies  
(2012: 67). On 14 February 2014 the 
Group announced its further equity 
capital raise of £100m of cash before 
expenses.

The value of the Group’s holdings 
in portfolio companies increased to 
£285.9m at year end (2012: £181.8m) 
after net unrealised fair value gains of 
£82.4m and net investment of £22.0m 
(2012: £38.0m net unrealised fair value 
gain; £9.6m net investment). The Portfolio 
review on pages 14 to 26 contains a 
detailed description of the Group’s 
portfolio of equity and debt investments 
including key developments and 
movements during the year. 

The Group’s statement of financial 
position includes goodwill of £18.4m 
(2012: £18.4m) and an equity rights 
asset of £2.9m (2012: £7.9m). The 
goodwill balances arose as a result of 
the Group’s historical acquisitions of 
Techtran Group (university partnership 
business, £16.3m; 2012: £16.3m) and Top 
Technology Ventures (venture capital 
fund management business, £2.1m; 2012: 
£2.1m). The equity rights asset represents 
amounts paid to the University of Oxford 
in 2000 and 2001 giving the Group the 
right to receive 50% of the university’s 
entitlement to equity in any spin-out 
company and of any licensing income 
emanating from the University of Oxford’s 
Department of Chemistry until 2015. 

As highlighted in 2012, the date of 
expiry (November 2015) of the contract 
underpinning the Oxford Equity Rights 
Asset draws closer, and the value to the 
Group of the corresponding asset under 
IFRS reduces. The asset value will have 
been written off by way of fair value 
reduction or impairment through the 
statement of comprehensive income by 
the expiry date. Based on the directors’ 
calculations, and as described more 
fully in note 14 to the Group’s financial 
statements, the fair value of the contract 
at 31 December 2013 has reduced by 
£5.0m (2012: £6.0m).

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceTotal equity (“net assets”) (£m)

£336.6m  (2012: £263.1m)

336.6

263.1

221.6

171.0

173.1

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

Profit/(loss) attributable to equity holders (£m)

£72.6m  (2012: £40.7m)

72.6

40.7

(6.1)

1.8

(5.5)

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

Cash, cash equivalents and deposits (£m)

£24.1m  (2012: £47.9m)

60.5

47.9

28.1

21.5

24.1

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

It remains the Group’s policy to place 
cash which is surplus to near-term 
working capital requirements on short-
term and overnight deposits with financial 
institutions that meet the Group’s 
treasury policy criteria and in low-risk 
treasury funds rated “AA” or above. The 
Group’s treasury policy is described in 
detail in note 2 to the Group financial 
statements alongside details of the credit 
ratings of the Group’s cash and deposit 
counterparties. 

At 31 December 2013, the Group 
recognises £1.3m of loans (2012: £nil) 
from the limited partners of IPVFII, a 
fund raised during the period which is 
consolidated into the Group’s year-end 
figures. These loans are only repayable 
upon IPVFII generating sufficient returns 
to repay the limited partners. Whilst the 
Group continued to have no borrowings, 
it may in the future consider introducing a 
modest level of gearing into the business 
if this is considered to be in the best 
interests of the Group.

During the period, the Group 
incorporated a new subsidiary, IP Group 
Inc., in Delaware, USA in order to support 
the development of US-based intellectual 
property commercialisation opportunities. 
The Group holds a total of £0.1m  
(2012: £nil) in US dollars.

Taxation
Since the Group’s activities are mainly 
trading in nature, the directors continue 
to believe that the Group qualifies for 
the Substantial Shareholdings Exemption 
(“SSE”) on chargeable gains arising on 
the disposal of qualifying holdings and, 
as such, the Group has continued not 
to recognise a provision for deferred 
taxation in respect of uplifts in value 
on those equity stakes which meet 
the qualifying criteria. The Group’s 
unrecognised deferred tax assets and 
liabilities are set out in note 9 to the 
financial statements.

Due to the nature of its activities, the 
Group has limited current assets or 
current liabilities other than its cash and 
short-term deposit balances, which are 
considered in more detail below.

Cash, cash equivalents and  
short-term deposits (“Cash”)
The principal constituents of the 
movement in Cash during the year are 
summarised as follows:

2013
 £m

2012
 £m

Net cash used in 
operating activities 
(excluding cash flows 
from deposits)

Net cash used in 
investing activities

(1.9)

(2.6)

(21.9)

(10.0)

Issued share capital

—

—

Movement during 
period

(23.8)

(12.6)

At 31 December 2013, the Group’s  
Cash totalled £24.1m, a decrease of 
£23.8m from a total of £47.9m at  
31 December 2012 predominantly due 
to net investment in the Group’s spin-out 
companies.

The Group’s net cash used in investing 
activities increased during 2013, reflecting 
both an increase in investments (2013: 
£27.5m; 2012: £26.3m) and a decrease in 
realisations (2013: £5.5m; 2012: £16.7m). 
As described in more detail in the 
Portfolio review on pages 14 to 26, the 
Group allocated a total of £27.5m across 
44 portfolio companies during the period 
(2012: £26.3m; 43 companies).

A further £0.2m was committed to IP 
Venture Fund (2012: £0.4m), which in 
turn invested £1.4m across six portfolio 
companies (2012: £3.0m; 15 companies) 
and realised £1.8m from one partial 
disposal. Overall, net cash used in 
investing activities totalled £21.9m  
(2012: £10.0m). 

Primarily as a result of a £1.1m increase 
in trade and other payables, which was 
partially offset by higher administrative 
costs during the period, cash used in 
operating activities decreased to £1.9m 
(2012: £2.6m).

29

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformanceKey performance indicators

Measuring our performance: 
focusing on delivery against  
our strategy

KPI

Further description

2013 performance

Strategic element

Risks potentially impacting KPI

director remuneration

Total equity (“net assets”)

The value of the Group’s assets less the value of 
its liabilities, including minority interest

£336.6m 
(2012: £263.1m)

Profit/(loss) attributable to  
equity holders

Profit/(loss) after tax for the year, attributable to 
owners of the parent

£72.6m 
(2012: £40.7m)

Number of new portfolio companies

The number of portfolio companies that received 
initial capital from the Group during the year

9 
(2012: 11)

Purchase of equity and debt 
investments

The total level of capital deployed from the 
Group’s balance sheet into portfolio companies 
during the year

Change in fair value of equity and 
debt investments

Movement in the value of holdings in the 
portfolio due to share price movements or 
impairments in value

£27.5m 
(2012: £26.3m)

£82.4m 
(2012: £38.0m)

Proceeds from sale of equity 
investments

The total amount received from the disposal of 
interests in portfolio companies

£5.5m 
(2012: £16.7m)

Cash, cash equivalents and deposits

The total amount of cash and short-term deposits 
held on the Group’s balance sheet at year end

£24.1m 
(2012: £47.9m)

To grow the value of our assets (and 

those we manage on behalf of third 

parties) and deliver attractive financial 

returns from these assets.

Portfolio fair value movement has the 

most material impact on this figure 

which also reflects corporate expenses. 

Measures the development of portfolio 

companies and return on our assets.

1

2

5

1

2

5

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 

opportunities and develop these into 

3

4

robust businesses.

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 

opportunities and develop these into 

2

3

4

robust businesses.

To develop IP-based businesses and 

grow their value

1

2

Cash from proceeds can be used for  

re-deployment into the portfolio or for 

1

5

new opportunities

Cash is required to enable the Group to 

provide capital to compelling intellectual 

1

5

IP-based opportunities

Link to performance related  

•	 LTIP 2011

•	 LTIP 2012

•	 2013 annual incentive

•	 2013 annual incentive

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

IP Group share price performance  
(% change)

Movement in the value of the Group’s shares 
during the year under assessment

42% 
(2012: 53%)

To provide attractive returns for our 

shareholders

1

2

3

4

5

•	 LTIP 2011

•	 LTIP 2012

•	 2013 annual incentive

30

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Strategic Report Our PerformanceKPI

Further description

2013 performance

Strategic element

Risks potentially impacting KPI

Total equity (“net assets”)

The value of the Group’s assets less the value of 

£336.6m 

its liabilities, including minority interest

(2012: £263.1m)

Profit/(loss) attributable to  

equity holders

Profit/(loss) after tax for the year, attributable to 

£72.6m 

owners of the parent

(2012: £40.7m)

Number of new portfolio companies

The number of portfolio companies that received 

9 

initial capital from the Group during the year

(2012: 11)

Purchase of equity and debt 

investments

The total level of capital deployed from the 

£27.5m 

Group’s balance sheet into portfolio companies 

(2012: £26.3m)

during the year

Change in fair value of equity and 

debt investments

Movement in the value of holdings in the 

£82.4m 

portfolio due to share price movements or 

(2012: £38.0m)

impairments in value

Proceeds from sale of equity 

investments

The total amount received from the disposal of 

£5.5m 

interests in portfolio companies

(2012: £16.7m)

Cash, cash equivalents and deposits

The total amount of cash and short-term deposits 

£24.1m 

held on the Group’s balance sheet at year end

(2012: £47.9m)

To grow the value of our assets (and 
those we manage on behalf of third 
parties) and deliver attractive financial 
returns from these assets.

Portfolio fair value movement has the 
most material impact on this figure 
which also reflects corporate expenses. 
Measures the development of portfolio 
companies and return on our assets.

1

2

5

1

2

5

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 
opportunities and develop these into 
robust businesses.

3

4

Build and maintain a pipeline of IP-based 
opportunities and develop these into 
robust businesses.

2

3

4

To develop IP-based businesses and 
grow their value

Cash from proceeds can be used for  
re-deployment into the portfolio or for 
new opportunities

Cash is required to enable the Group to 
provide capital to compelling intellectual 
IP-based opportunities

1

2

1

5

1

5

Link to performance related  
director remuneration

•	 LTIP 2011

•	 LTIP 2012

•	 2013 annual incentive

•	 2013 annual incentive

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

•	 N/A

IP Group share price performance  

(% change)

Movement in the value of the Group’s shares 

42% 

during the year under assessment

(2012: 53%)

To provide attractive returns for our 
shareholders

1

2

3

4

5

•	 LTIP 2011

•	 LTIP 2012

•	 2013 annual incentive

  For more information on our strategy  
see pages 10 and 11

  For more information on our risk 
management see pages 32 to 37

  For more information on directors’ 
remuneration see pages 53 to 70

31

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comStrategic Report Our PerformanceRisk management

Managing risk: our framework 
for balancing risk and reward

Strong and effective risk management is central to how the Directors run the business 
and supports the achievement of the Group’s strategic objectives. The Board believes that 
ongoing consideration and regular updates to the risk management framework enables 
the effective balancing of risk and reward. 

The framework for evaluating risk is:

Ongoing process to evaluate 
and update the risk management 
framework, to consider the level of risk 
appetite for each risk and the operating 
effectiveness of each ‘line of defence’.

Develop and 
communicate 
strategy and 
objectives

Risk assessments  
are monitored 
regularly by the  
Audit Committee  
and overseen by  
the Board. 

Review and 
monitor 
success of 
actions

Risk
Framework

Identify and 
assess risks

Financial and non-financial 
risks are recorded in the 
Group’s risk register. Risks 
are analysed for likelihood 
and potential impact.

Mitigate risk

Required actions are 
agreed and assigned, and 
deadlines are set. 

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

32

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
‘Levels of defence’ applied by the Group:

Strategic

Operational

External

Audit Committee (2) 

Remuneration Committee (3)

Nomination committee (4)

Board (1)

Executive management (5) 

Investment committee (6) 

Legal

Compliance (7) 

Independent assurance (8)

1.  The Board has overall responsibility 

for the Group’s risk management and 
internal controls, sets the ‘tone from 
the top’, sets the strategic objectives, 
defines the risk appetite and monitors 
the risk exposure. The whistleblowing 
policy encourages disclosures to be 
addressed to the Board Chairman and/
or any other Non-executive Director.

2.  The Audit Committee oversees the 
effectiveness of the internal control 
function and risk management 
systems within the Group.

3.  The Remuneration Committee 

ensures the appropriate incentivisation 
of Executive directors and staff. 

4.  The Nomination Committee ensures 
that the Board has the appropriate 
balance of skills and knowledge 
required to assess and address risk, 
and that appropriate succession plans 
are in place. 

5.  Executive management identify, assess 

and manage the risks identified. 

6.  The Investment Committee reviews 

the merits of each investment 
proposal and ensures that investment 
decisions are aligned with the Group’s 
strategic objectives and within the 
acceptable risk limits. 

7.  The compliance function ensures that 
all regulated activity undertaken is 
within the regulated boundaries and 
permissions.

8.  Independent assurance is provided by 
the independent auditors and various 
external consultants and advisers. 
External consultants and advisers 
support management and the Board 
through ad hoc consulting activities, 
as required. 

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

33

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Risk management
continued

As described further in the Corporate Governance report on pages 40 to 49, the 
operations of the Group and the implementation of its objectives and strategy are subject 
to a number of key risks and uncertainties. Risks are reviewed by the Board at least annually 
and appropriate procedures are put in place to monitor and, to the extent possible, 
mitigate these risks. 

Risk and description

Impact

Mitigation

Risk trend

Progress during the year

KPI

1 The returns and cash proceeds from the Group’s 

early-stage companies can be very uncertain

The following risks are typically associated with early-stage companies 
that can have a high risk of failure:

•	 may not be able to secure later rounds of funding;

•	 may not be able to source or retain appropriately skilled staff;

•	 competing technologies may enter the market;

•	

•	

technology can be materially unproven and may fail; 

IP may be infringed, copied or stolen;

•	 may be more susceptible to cyber-crime; and

•	 other administrative, taxation or compliance issues may lead to 

company failure.

•	 Portfolio company failure directly impacts the Group’s value and 

profitability.

•	 At any time, a large proportion of the Group’s portfolio value may be 

accounted for by one, or very few, companies which could exacerbate 
the impact of any impairment or failure of one or more of these 
companies. 

•	 Cash realisations from the Group’s portfolio through trade sales and 

IPOs could vary significantly from year to year.

2 It may be difficult for the Group and its early-stage 

companies to attract capital

The Group’s operations are reliant on capital markets, particularly those in 
the UK. As the Group’s operations, and the operations of the majority of 
its portfolio companies, are based in the UK, the financial and operational 
performance of the Group and particularly the ability of its portfolio 
companies to attract development capital is influenced by the general 
economic climate and trading conditions in the UK. 

•	 The UK’s recession and subsequent limited growth have had (and 

may continue to have) an adverse effect on trading conditions and 
availability of capital in the UK, particularly for smaller businesses.

•	 The success of those portfolio companies which require significant 
funding in the future may be influenced by the market’s appetite for 
investment in early stage companies, which may not be sufficient.

•	 Failure of companies within the Group’s portfolio may make it more 
difficult for the Group or its spin-out companies to raise additional 
capital.

3 Universities or other research intensive institutions may 

terminate their partnerships or other collaborative 
relationships with the Group

The Group’s business, results of operations and prospects are at least 
partially dependent on competitive advantage gained from access to 
leading scientific research through partnerships and other collaborative 
arrangements with research intensive institutions and commercial 
partners, such as Fusion IP, Technikos and Cambridge Innovation Capital.

•	 Termination or non-renewal of arrangements through failure to 
perform obligations may result in the loss of exclusive rights. 

•	 The loss of exclusive rights may limit the Group’s ability to secure 

attractive IP opportunities to commercialise. 

•	 This could potentially have a material adverse effect on the Group’s 

long-term business, results of operations, performance and prospects. 

•	 With several new entrants to our market, this may reduce our 

opportunities to create new spin-out businesses.

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

34

Key:

Increase

Decrease

No change

•	 The Group’s staff have significant experience in 

sourcing, developing and growing early-stage 

technology companies to significant value, including 

systematic opportunity evaluation and business building 

methodologies. 

•	 Members of the Group’s senior team often serve as non-

executive directors or advisers to portfolio companies to 

help identify and remedy critical issues promptly.

•	 Support on operational, legal and company secretarial 

matters is offered to minimise failures due to common 

administrative factors.

•	 The Group has spin-out company holdings across 

different sectors to reduce the impact of a single 

company failure or sector demise.

•	 The Group maintains significant cash balances and 

seeks to employ a capital efficient process deploying 

low levels of initial capital to enable identification and 

mitigation of potential failures at the earliest possible 

stage. 

•	 The Group has significant balance sheet and 

managed funds capital to deploy in attractive portfolio 

•	 The Group operates a corporate finance function 

which carries out fundraising mandates for portfolio 

opportunities.

companies. 

•	 The Group maintains close relationships with a wide 

variety of co-investors that focus on companies at 

differing stages of development.

appropriate, enter into new and innovative partnerships 

and collaborations with research institutions.

•	 The Group has been able to source opportunities 

through non-exclusive relationships and other sources. 

•	 Members of the Group’s senior team work closely with 

partner institutions to ensure that each commercial 

relationship is mutually beneficial and productive.

•	 The Group’s track record in IP commercialisation 

may make the Group a partner of choice for other 

institutions, acting as a barrier to entry to competitors.

•	 The Group broadly 

maintained its rate of 

•	 Change in fair value 

of equity and debt 

capital deployment into its 

investments.

portfolio in the year

•	 Purchase of equity and 

•	 Significant increase in 

debt investments.

•	 Proceeds from the sale of 

equity investments.

portfolio value driven by 

progress across a number 

of portfolio companies.

•	 Some signs of increased 

liquidity and shareholder 

risk appetite observed on 

AIM.

•	 Some strengthening of 

•	 Change in fair value 

economic outlook and 

increased liquidity/risk 

appetite in the equity 

capital markets, albeit from 

a low base.

•	 The Group raised £100m in 

February 2014, of which the 

majority is intended to be 

deployed into the portfolio.

of equity and debt 

investments.

•	 Total equity (“net assets”).

•	 Profit/loss attributable to 

equity holders.

•	 Pilot agreements signed 

with two Ivy League US 

universities.

•	 Oxford Chemistry contract 

due to expire in November 

2015.

•	 Full access to Fusion 

IP university partners 

anticipated assuming 

completion of full 

acquisition.

•	 The Group continues to consider and, where 

•	 PoP agreement signed with 

•	 Number of new portfolio 

University of Manchester.

companies.

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
The following risks are typically associated with early-stage companies 

accounted for by one, or very few, companies which could exacerbate 

that can have a high risk of failure:

the impact of any impairment or failure of one or more of these 

•	 At any time, a large proportion of the Group’s portfolio value may be 

•	 Portfolio company failure directly impacts the Group’s value and 

Impact

profitability.

companies. 

•	 Cash realisations from the Group’s portfolio through trade sales and 

IPOs could vary significantly from year to year.

Risk and description

1 The returns and cash proceeds from the Group’s 

early-stage companies can be very uncertain

•	 may not be able to secure later rounds of funding;

•	 may not be able to source or retain appropriately skilled staff;

•	 competing technologies may enter the market;

technology can be materially unproven and may fail; 

IP may be infringed, copied or stolen;

•	 may be more susceptible to cyber-crime; and

•	

•	

•	 other administrative, taxation or compliance issues may lead to 

company failure.

2 It may be difficult for the Group and its early-stage 

companies to attract capital

•	 The UK’s recession and subsequent limited growth have had (and 

may continue to have) an adverse effect on trading conditions and 

availability of capital in the UK, particularly for smaller businesses.

The Group’s operations are reliant on capital markets, particularly those in 

•	 The success of those portfolio companies which require significant 

the UK. As the Group’s operations, and the operations of the majority of 

its portfolio companies, are based in the UK, the financial and operational 

performance of the Group and particularly the ability of its portfolio 

companies to attract development capital is influenced by the general 

economic climate and trading conditions in the UK. 

funding in the future may be influenced by the market’s appetite for 

investment in early stage companies, which may not be sufficient.

•	 Failure of companies within the Group’s portfolio may make it more 

difficult for the Group or its spin-out companies to raise additional 

capital.

3 Universities or other research intensive institutions may 

terminate their partnerships or other collaborative 

relationships with the Group

•	 Termination or non-renewal of arrangements through failure to 

perform obligations may result in the loss of exclusive rights. 

•	 The loss of exclusive rights may limit the Group’s ability to secure 

attractive IP opportunities to commercialise. 

The Group’s business, results of operations and prospects are at least 

•	 This could potentially have a material adverse effect on the Group’s 

partially dependent on competitive advantage gained from access to 

long-term business, results of operations, performance and prospects. 

leading scientific research through partnerships and other collaborative 

arrangements with research intensive institutions and commercial 

partners, such as Fusion IP, Technikos and Cambridge Innovation Capital.

•	 With several new entrants to our market, this may reduce our 

opportunities to create new spin-out businesses.

Were more than one of the risks to occur together, the overall impact on the Group may 
be compounded. A summary of the key risks affecting the Group and the steps taken to 
manage these is set out as follows:

Mitigation

Risk trend

Progress during the year

KPI

•	 The Group’s staff have significant experience in 
sourcing, developing and growing early-stage 
technology companies to significant value, including 
systematic opportunity evaluation and business building 
methodologies. 

•	 Members of the Group’s senior team often serve as non-
executive directors or advisers to portfolio companies to 
help identify and remedy critical issues promptly.

•	 Support on operational, legal and company secretarial 
matters is offered to minimise failures due to common 
administrative factors.

•	 The Group has spin-out company holdings across 

different sectors to reduce the impact of a single 
company failure or sector demise.

•	 The Group maintains significant cash balances and 

seeks to employ a capital efficient process deploying 
low levels of initial capital to enable identification and 
mitigation of potential failures at the earliest possible 
stage. 

•	 The Group has significant balance sheet and 

managed funds capital to deploy in attractive portfolio 
opportunities.

•	 The Group operates a corporate finance function 

which carries out fundraising mandates for portfolio 
companies. 

•	 The Group maintains close relationships with a wide 
variety of co-investors that focus on companies at 
differing stages of development.

•	 The Group continues to consider and, where 

appropriate, enter into new and innovative partnerships 
and collaborations with research institutions.

•	 The Group has been able to source opportunities 

through non-exclusive relationships and other sources. 

•	 Members of the Group’s senior team work closely with 
partner institutions to ensure that each commercial 
relationship is mutually beneficial and productive.

•	 The Group’s track record in IP commercialisation 

may make the Group a partner of choice for other 
institutions, acting as a barrier to entry to competitors.

•	 The Group broadly 

maintained its rate of 
capital deployment into its 
portfolio in the year

•	 Change in fair value 
of equity and debt 
investments.

•	 Purchase of equity and 

•	 Significant increase in 

debt investments.

•	 Proceeds from the sale of 

equity investments.

portfolio value driven by 
progress across a number 
of portfolio companies.

•	 Some signs of increased 
liquidity and shareholder 
risk appetite observed on 
AIM.

•	 Some strengthening of 
economic outlook and 
increased liquidity/risk 
appetite in the equity 
capital markets, albeit from 
a low base.

•	 The Group raised £100m in 
February 2014, of which the 
majority is intended to be 
deployed into the portfolio.

•	 Change in fair value 
of equity and debt 
investments.

•	 Total equity (“net assets”).

•	 Profit/loss attributable to 

equity holders.

•	 PoP agreement signed with 
University of Manchester.

•	 Number of new portfolio 

companies.

•	 Pilot agreements signed 
with two Ivy League US 
universities.

•	 Oxford Chemistry contract 
due to expire in November 
2015.

•	 Full access to Fusion 
IP university partners 
anticipated assuming 
completion of full 
acquisition.

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

35

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Risk management
continued

Risk and description

Impact

Risk trend

Progress during the year

KPI

4 The Group may lose key personnel or fail to attract and 

integrate new personnel

The industry in which the Group operates is a specialised area and the 
Group requires highly qualified and experienced employees. There is a 
risk that the Group’s employees could be approached and solicited by 
competitors or other technology-based companies and organisations, 
or could otherwise choose to leave the Group. Given the relatively small 
size of the Group, its operations are reliant on a small number of key 
individuals. Scaling the team presents an additional potential risk.

5 There may be changes to, or impacts from, legislation, 

government policy and regulation

There may be unforeseen changes in, or impacts from, government 
policy, regulation or legislation (including taxation legislation). This could 
include changes to funding levels or to the terms upon which public 
moneys are made available to universities and research institutions and 
the ownership of any resulting intellectual property.

•	 Loss of key executives and employees of the Group or an inability to 
attract, retain and integrate appropriately skilled and experiences staff 
could have an adverse effect on the Group’s competitive advantage, 
business, financial condition, operational results and/or future 
prospects.

•	 Senior team succession plans are in place and updated 

•	 The Group undertook 

•	 Total equity (“net assets”)

•	

IP Group share price 

performance

•	 Changes could result in universities and research institutions no longer 

•	 University partners are incentivised to protect their IP for 

•	 Ongoing focus on 

•	 Total equity (“net assets”).

being able to own, exploit or protect intellectual property.

•	 Changes in government policy or legislation may make it unattractive 
for research academics to participate in the commercialisation of the 
IP that they create. 

•	 Changes to tax legislation or the nature of the Group’s activities, in 
particular in relation to the substantial shareholder exemption, may 
adversely affect the Group’s tax position and accordingly its value and 
operations.

•	 The Group operates an FCA-authorised subsidiary and regulatory 

changes or breaches could ultimately lead to withdrawal of regulatory 
permissions, loss of fund management contracts, reputational damage 
or fines.

Mitigation

regularly.

•	 The Group carries out regular market comparisons for 

staff and executive remuneration.

•	 The Group seeks to offer a balanced incentive package 

comprising a mix of salary, benefits, performance-

based long-term incentives and benefits such as flexible 

working or salary sacrifice arrangements.

•	 The long-term incentives for all senior staff are in the 

form of shares in the Group and all executives are 

shareholders in the business.

•	 The Group encourages staff development and inclusion 

through coaching and mentoring.

exploitation as the partnership agreements share returns 

between universities, academic founders and the Group. 

•	 The Group’s university partners also maintain close links 

with the government to manage their position with 

respect to future legislative changes.

•	 The Group utilises professional advisers as appropriate to 

support its monitoring of, and response to changes in, 

tax or other legislation. 

•	 The Group has internal policies and procedures to 

ensure its compliance with applicable FCA regulations 

and these are subject to external review.

a full remuneration and 

incentivisation review in 

2013 and continues to 

dedicate resource to this.

•	 The Group is anticipated to 

increase the breadth and 

depth of its staff as a result 

of the Fusion IP acquisition 

(subject to completion)

regulatory compliance 

including third party 

reviews.

•	 No apparent reduction in 

governmental support of 

research and intellectual 

property focused 

businesses.

•	

IP Group share price 

performance.

In addition, through its normal operations the Group is exposed to a number of financial risks, 
comprising liquidity, market and credit risks. Further quantitative information is set out in note 2 to the 
Group’s financial statements.

Key:

Increase

Decrease

No change

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

36

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
4 The Group may lose key personnel or fail to attract and 

integrate new personnel

The industry in which the Group operates is a specialised area and the 

Group requires highly qualified and experienced employees. There is a 

risk that the Group’s employees could be approached and solicited by 

competitors or other technology-based companies and organisations, 

or could otherwise choose to leave the Group. Given the relatively small 

size of the Group, its operations are reliant on a small number of key 

individuals. Scaling the team presents an additional potential risk.

•	 Loss of key executives and employees of the Group or an inability to 

attract, retain and integrate appropriately skilled and experiences staff 

could have an adverse effect on the Group’s competitive advantage, 

business, financial condition, operational results and/or future 

prospects.

5 There may be changes to, or impacts from, legislation, 

government policy and regulation

•	 Changes could result in universities and research institutions no longer 

being able to own, exploit or protect intellectual property.

•	 Changes in government policy or legislation may make it unattractive 

for research academics to participate in the commercialisation of the 

There may be unforeseen changes in, or impacts from, government 

policy, regulation or legislation (including taxation legislation). This could 

IP that they create. 

include changes to funding levels or to the terms upon which public 

moneys are made available to universities and research institutions and 

the ownership of any resulting intellectual property.

•	 Changes to tax legislation or the nature of the Group’s activities, in 

particular in relation to the substantial shareholder exemption, may 

adversely affect the Group’s tax position and accordingly its value and 

•	 The Group operates an FCA-authorised subsidiary and regulatory 

changes or breaches could ultimately lead to withdrawal of regulatory 

permissions, loss of fund management contracts, reputational damage 

operations.

or fines.

Risk and description

Impact

Mitigation

Risk trend

Progress during the year

KPI

•	 Senior team succession plans are in place and updated 

•	 The Group undertook 

•	 Total equity (“net assets”)

regularly.

•	 The Group carries out regular market comparisons for 

staff and executive remuneration.

•	 The Group seeks to offer a balanced incentive package 
comprising a mix of salary, benefits, performance-
based long-term incentives and benefits such as flexible 
working or salary sacrifice arrangements.

•	 The long-term incentives for all senior staff are in the 
form of shares in the Group and all executives are 
shareholders in the business.

•	 The Group encourages staff development and inclusion 

through coaching and mentoring.

•	 University partners are incentivised to protect their IP for 
exploitation as the partnership agreements share returns 
between universities, academic founders and the Group. 

•	 The Group’s university partners also maintain close links 
with the government to manage their position with 
respect to future legislative changes.

•	 The Group utilises professional advisers as appropriate to 
support its monitoring of, and response to changes in, 
tax or other legislation. 

•	 The Group has internal policies and procedures to 

ensure its compliance with applicable FCA regulations 
and these are subject to external review.

•	

IP Group share price 
performance

a full remuneration and 
incentivisation review in 
2013 and continues to 
dedicate resource to this.

•	 The Group is anticipated to 
increase the breadth and 
depth of its staff as a result 
of the Fusion IP acquisition 
(subject to completion)

•	 Ongoing focus on 

•	 Total equity (“net assets”).

•	

IP Group share price 
performance.

regulatory compliance 
including third party 
reviews.

•	 No apparent reduction in 
governmental support of 
research and intellectual 
property focused 
businesses.

Board approval

The Strategic Report, as set out on pages 01 to 37, has been approved by the Board.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Bruce Smith 
Chairman
3 March 2014

t
n
e
m
e
g
a
n
a
M
k
s
i
R

t
r
o
p
e
R
c
g
e
t
a
r
t
S

i

37

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Board of Directors

Dr Bruce Smith, CBE
Non-executive 
Chairman

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

Mike Townend
Chief Investment Officer

Charles Winward
Managing Director,  
TTV

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
3 September 20071

Effective date of current 
service contract
20 January 2005

Effective date of current 
service contract
2 June 2011

Effective date of current 
service contract
5 March 2007

Effective date of current 
service contract
14 October 2011

Age
35

Independent
No

Tenure
2 years 

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
KPMG background,  
10+ yrs ACA

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
None

Age
51

Independent
No

Tenure
7 years

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
17+ years equity capital 
markets experience at 
Lehman Brothers and 
Donaldson, Lufkin and 
Jenrette

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
None

Age
44

Independent
No

Tenure
2 years 

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
7 years VP Technology 
at JP Morgan, CFA 
Charterholder, MBA 
Berkeley

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
None

Age
52

Independent
No

Tenure
9 years 

Term of office
Permanent, 6 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Founder of Techtran 
Group, 7 years as partner 
at KPMG, FCA 20+ years 

Current external 
appointments3
NED Department of 
Business, Innovation and 
Skills, Non-executive 
chairman Proactis 
Holdings plc

Committee memberships
None

Age
74

Independent
N/A2

Tenure
11 years

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Founder of Smith System 
Engineering Ltd. Fellow 
of Royal Academy of 
Engineering, Institution 
of Engineering and 
Technology and Institute 
of Physics, Domus Fellow 
of St. Catherine’s College, 
Oxford

Current external 
appointments3
Chairman of the Council 
of Smith Institute for 
Industrial Mathematics and 
System Engineering

Committee memberships
Nomination (chair)

N   

1.  Refers to current appointment. Dr Smith was first appointed to the Group’s Board on 4 September 2003.

2.  Dr Smith was considered by the Board to be independent on appointment.

3.  Excludes appointments to group portfolio company boards.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

38

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
Mike Humphrey
Senior Independent 
Director

Francis Carpenter
Non-executive Director

Jonathan Brooks
Non-executive Director

Professor Lynn 
Gladden, CBE
Non-executive Director

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
14 October 2011

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
3 April 2008

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
31 August 2011

Effective date of current 
letter of appointment
26 March 2014

Age
62

Independent
Yes

Tenure
2 years 

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Formerly 40+ years at 
Croda plc including  
13 years as CEO

Current external 
appointments3
None

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration

N    A   A R

Age
71

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
5 years

Age
57

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
2 years 

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Formerly CEO European 
Investment Fund and 
Secretary General of 
European Investment Bank

Current external 
appointments3
17 Capital LLP  
supervisory board

iVCi investment 
committee

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice 

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Formerly CFO ARM 
Holdings plc, 20+ years 
technology sector 
experience, FCMA

Current external 
appointments3
Audit committee  
chairman Aveva plc 

Chairman Xyratex 
(NASDAQ)

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration (chair)

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit (chair) 
and Remuneration

N    A   A R

N    A   A R

Age
52

Independent
Yes 

Tenure
< 1 year

Term of office
3 years, with 3 months’ 
notice

Re-election to Board 
Annually at AGM

Experience 
Fellow of the Royal 
Society, Royal Academy of 
Engineering, Institution of 
Chemical Engineers, Royal 
Society of Chemistry and 
Institute of Physics

Current external 
appointments3
Pro-Vice-Chancellor for 
Research, University of 
Cambridge. Shell Professor 
of Chemical Engineering. 
Director, Cambridge 
Enterprise Ltd

Committee memberships
Nomination, Audit and 
Remuneration

N    A   A R

Key:

N

A

Nomination Committee

Audit Committee

A R

Remuneration Committee

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

39

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Corporate Governance

A successful year: 
addressing Board 
diversity

2013 has been a year of strong performance 
for IP Group which has been reflected in 
a significant increase in the value of the 
Group’s portfolio and its net assets.

The Board remains focused on the execution of 
the Group’s strategy, working with its partners to 
develop outstanding intellectual property-based 
businesses, and, in doing so, it continues to recognise 
the importance of a strong focus on corporate 
governance. Corporate governance at IP Group is 
more than just compliance with rules and regulations. 
It is an integral part of all of our activities, especially 
those of the Board and its committees. 

During 2013 and in early 2014, the Board has seen a number 
of changes to its composition and I am pleased to report that, 
following Professor Lynn Gladden’s recent appointment, we are 
now compliant with the provisions of the Code. Professor Gladden’s 
appointment strengthens the Board’s diversity amongst a range 
of measures and her knowledge of both science and business is 
highly relevant to the IP Group model and will be of huge value 
to the Group as we continue to expand and grow. Succession 
planning, both at Board level and in other key areas of the business, 
will continue to remain an area of focus for the Board as we move 
through 2014. 

The Board is accountable to the Company’s shareholders for 
good governance and this report, together with the Reports of the 
Remuneration, Nomination and Audit Committees of the Board 
describes our detailed approach to corporate governance and 
further information on the key developments in these areas during 
the year. 

I look forward to being able to discuss these matters with our 
shareholders at the Group’s forthcoming AGM or indeed at any other 

point during the year. 

Dr Bruce Smith  Chairman

Compliance with the UK Corporate 
Governance Code
The Directors are committed to a high 
standard of corporate governance and 
to compliance with the best practice of 
the UK Corporate Governance Code (the 
“Code”) which was issued by the Financial 
Reporting Council in 2010 and revised 
in September 2012. During the twelve 
months ended 31 December 2013, the 
Directors consider that the Company has 
been in compliance with the provisions 
set out in the Code with the following 
exception: the requirement under the 
Code (Section B.1.2) for at least half 
the Board, excluding the Chairman, to 
comprise Non-executive Directors was 
not met during the year. The Nomination 
Committee has met on a number of 
occasions throughout the year to debate 
this specific issue, amongst others, one 
of the outcomes of which has led to the 
appointment of Professor Lynn Gladden 
as an additional independent Non-
executive Director with effect from  
26 March 2014. The Company will 
accordingly be compliant with Section 
B.1.2 of the Code with effect from 
Professor Gladden’s appointment.

Further explanation as to how the 
provisions set out in the Code have 
been applied by the Company is set 
out in the following statement, the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report, the Audit 
Committee Report and the Strategic 
Report. The Company’s auditor, BDO 
LLP, is required to review whether the 
above statement reflects the Company’s 
compliance with the provisions of the 
Code specified for its review by the 
Listing Rules of the UK Listing Authority 
and to report if it does not reflect such 
compliance; no such report has been 
made.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

40

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
Nomination 
Committee

Audit
Committee

Board

Remuneration 
Committee

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

Chief 
Executive

Senior
Management
Team

Except for a formal schedule of matters 
which are reserved for decision and 
approval by the Board, the Board has 
delegated the day-to-day management 
of the Group to the Chief Executive 
Officer who is supported by the Executive 
Directors and other members of the 
senior management team. The schedule 
of matters reserved for Board decision 
and approval are those significant to the 
Group as a whole due to their strategic, 
financial or reputational implications. 
This schedule is reviewed and updated 
regularly and currently includes those 
matters set out in the box overleaf.

themselves on the integrity of financial 
information and that financial controls 
and systems of risk management are 
robust.

The Board reviews strategic issues on 
a regular basis and exercises control 
over the performance of the Group 
by agreeing budgetary targets and 
monitoring performance against 
those targets. The Board has overall 
responsibility for the Group’s system of 
internal controls and risk management, 
as described on pages 32 to 37. Any 
decisions made by the Board on policies 
and strategy to be adopted by the Group 
or changes to current policies and 
strategy are made following presentations 
by the Executive Directors and a detailed 
process of review and challenge by 
the Board. Once made, the Executive 
Directors are fully empowered to 
implement those decisions.

41

The Board
Role and responsibilities  
of the Board 
The Board is responsible to shareholders 
for the overall management of the Group 
as a whole, providing entrepreneurial 
leadership within a framework of 
controls for assessing and managing risk; 
defining, challenging and interrogating 
the Group’s strategic aims and direction; 
maintaining the policy and decision-
making framework in which such 
strategic aims are implemented; ensuring 
that the necessary financial and human 
resources are in place to meet strategic 
aims; monitoring performance against 
key financial and non-financial indicators; 
succession planning; overseeing the 
system of risk management; setting 
values and standards in governance 
matters and monitoring policies and 
performance on corporate social 
responsibility. The directors are also 
responsible for ensuring that obligations 
to shareholders and other stakeholders 
are understood and met and a satisfactory 
dialogue with shareholders is maintained. 
All directors are equally accountable 
to the Company’s shareholders for the 
proper stewardship of its affairs and the 
long-term success of the Group.

The responsibility of the directors 
is collective, taking into account 
their respective roles as Executive 
Directors and Non-executive 
Directors. The Executive Directors 
are directly responsible for running 
the business operations and the Non-
executive Directors are responsible for 
constructively challenging proposals on 
strategy, scrutinising the performance 
of management, determining levels 
of remuneration and for succession 
planning for the Executive Directors. The 
Non-executive Directors must also satisfy 

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Available from the Company 
Secretary or on our 
Corporate Website

 www.ipgroupplc.com

Corporate Governance
continued

Matters Reserved 
for the Board

Include:
•	 Approval of the annual report, half-year results statement and the 

quarterly interim management statements, accounting policies and 
procedures or any matter having a material impact on future financial 
performance of the Group.

•	 Strategic acquisitions by the Group.

•	 Major portfolio capital allocation decisions, being those in excess of 

£2.5m per investment.

•	 The entry into by the Group of strategic partnerships and collaborations 

with universities and other research institutions.

•	 Major disposals from the Group’s portfolio.

•	 Approval and monitoring of the Group’s strategic plans and approval of 

the annual budget.

•	 Considering and, where appropriate, approving directors’ conflicts of 

interest.

•	 Approving Board appointments and removals and approving policies 

relating to directors’ remuneration.

•	 Approval of terms of reference and membership of Board committees.

•	 Approval, subject to shareholder approval, of the appointment and 

remuneration of the auditors.

•	 Approval of all circulars, prospectuses and other documents issued to 
shareholders governed by the FCA’s Listing Rules, Disclosure Rules or 
Transparency Rules or the City Code on Takeovers and Mergers.

•	 Changes to the Group’s capital structure, the issue of any securities and 

material borrowing of the Group. 

•	 The division of responsibility between the Chairman and the Chief 

Executive Officer.

•	 Major changes in employee share schemes.

•	 Litigation.

Board Committees

The terms of reference of each Committee establish its responsibilities.

Available from the Company 
Secretary or on our 
Corporate Website

 www.ipgroupplc.com

Executive Directors 
and Management 
Team

Day-to-day decisions are delegated to the Executive Directors and 
management via established procedures for approving decisions within 
business functions. 

The Board delegates specific 
responsibilities to certain committees 
that assist the Board in carrying out 
its functions and ensure independent 
oversight of internal control and risk 
management. The three principal Board 
committees (Audit, Remuneration and 
Nomination) play an essential role 
in supporting the Board in fulfilling 
its responsibilities and ensuring that 
the highest standards of corporate 
governance are maintained throughout 

the Group. Each committee has its own 
terms of reference which set out the 
specific matters for which delegated 
authority has been given by the Board. 
New terms of reference for each of the 
committees which are fully compliant 
with the provisions of the Code and 
which reflect both best practice and 
the recommendations arising from the 
external evaluation process undergone 
by the Board and its committees in early 
2013 were adopted by the Board during 

2013. These will be reviewed annually 
on an ongoing basis and updated where 
necessary. All of these are available on 
request from the Company Secretary  
or within the Corporate Governance  
section of the Group’s website at  
www.ipgroupplc.com. 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

42

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

Board size and composition
As at 31 December 2013, there were eight 
Directors on the Board: the Chairman, 
four Executive Directors and three 
Non-executive Directors. Professor Lynn 
Gladden was appointed as an additional 
independent Non-Executive Director 
with effect from 26 March 2014. The 
biographies of all of these directors are 
provided on pages 38 and 39. During 
the year, Dr Alison Fielding and Professor 
Graham Richards stepped down from 
the Board, in the case of Alison Fielding 
for personal reasons and in the case of 
Professor Graham Richards because 
of the length of his tenure as a Non-
executive Director meant that he was no 
longer regarded as independent from 
a governance perspective. Both have 
remained with the Group on a part-
time basis in roles which has enabled 
the Group to continue to leverage their 
significant expertise. 

The Company’s policy relating to 
the terms of appointment and the 
remuneration of both Executive and  
Non-executive Directors is detailed in  
the Directors’ Remuneration Report on  
pages 53 to 70.

The size and composition of the Board 
is regularly reviewed by the Board, and in 
particular the Nomination Committee, to 
ensure there is an appropriate and diverse 
mix of skills and experience on the Board. 

The Company’s Articles of Association 
require all directors to submit themselves 

for re-election by the shareholders at 
the Company’s Annual General Meeting 
following their first appointment and 
thereafter at each Annual General 
Meeting in respect of which they have 
held office for the two preceding Annual 
General Meetings and did not retire 
at either of them. In addition, each 
director who has held office with the 
Company for a continuous period of 
nine years or more must retire and offer 
themselves up for re-election at every 
Annual General Meeting. However, in 
accordance with the Code, all directors 
(other than Professor Lynn Gladden who 
has been appointed since the last general 
meeting of the Company held on 12 
February 2014) will submit themselves 
for annual re-election by shareholders 
at the Annual General Meeting of the 
Company to be held on 13 May 2014 (the 
“2014 AGM”). The Board recommends 
to shareholders the reappointment of 
all directors retiring at the meeting and 
offering themselves for re-election on the 
basis that the independent performance 
reviews demonstrated that they are all 
effective directors of the Company and 
continue to display the appropriate level 
of commitment in their respective roles. 
New directors may be appointed by the 
Board, but their appointment is subject 
to election by shareholders at the first 
opportunity after their appointment as 
is the case with Professor Lynn Gladden 
who will seek election at the 2014 AGM. 

Diversity
The Board is committed to a culture 
that attracts and retains talented people 
to deliver outstanding performance 
and further enhance the success of the 
Company. In that culture, diversity across 
a range of criteria is valued, primarily 
in relation to skills, knowledge and 
experience and also in other criteria such 
as gender and ethnicity. The Company 
will give careful consideration to issues 
of overall Board balance and diversity in 
making new appointments to the Board 
and, in identifying suitable candidates, 
the Nomination Committee will seek 
candidates from different genders and 
a range of backgrounds, with the final 
decision being based on merit against 
objective criteria. The Company has one 
female director on its Board and will aim 
to maintain female representation on 
the Board at least at this current level 
and give due consideration to increasing 
the level if appropriate candidates are 
available when Board vacancies arise. In 
addition, the revised terms of reference 
of the Nomination Committee which 
were adopted during the year include 
a requirement for the Committee to 
consider diversity, including gender, in 
evaluating the composition of the Board 
and in identifying suitable candidates for 
Board appointments. A breakdown of 
employee diversity showing the number 
of persons who were Directors of the 
Company and senior managers at the 
date of this report can be found on  
page 52. 

Board composition

As at date of report including unconditional appointments

Board tenure

Executive

4

Male

8

Non-Executive

0-5 years

5-10 years

5

Female

1

5

3

10+ years

1

43

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Corporate Governance
continued

Non-executive Directors
The Non-executive Directors provide 
a wide range of skills and experience 
to the Group. They bring their own 
senior level of experience in each of 
their own fields, robust opinions and an 
independent judgement on issues of 
strategy, performance, risk and people 
through their contribution and are well 
placed to constructively challenge 
and scrutinise the performance of 
management at Board and Committee 
meetings. The Code sets out the 
circumstances that should be relevant to 
the Board in determining whether each 
Non-executive Director is independent. 
The Board considers Non-executive 
Director independence on an annual 
basis as part of each Non-executive 
Director’s performance evaluation. 
Having undertaken this review and with 
due regard to provision B.1.1 of the 
Code, the Board has concluded this year 
that all of the Non-executive Directors 
are considered by the Board to be 
independent of management and free of 
any relationship or circumstance which 
could materially influence or interfere 
with, or affect, or appear to affect, the 
exercise of their independent judgement.

In a limited number of cases, the 
Chairman has, in the past, made 
de minimis investments in spin-out 
companies formed under the Group’s 
university partnerships. Such investments 
were made on arm’s length terms, 
on comparable terms to other third 
party angel investors participating in 
the same financing rounds and always 
represented minority participations 
in the relevant financing rounds. The 
Board does not therefore consider that 
such legacy personal investments act 
in any way to influence the Chairman’s 
oversight of the Board. In any event, all 
of the Chairman’s potential conflicts of 
interest are disclosed at the beginning 
of each Board meeting and he may be 
required by the Board to abstain from 
the deliberations by the Board and/or 
voting on a particular matter. Details of 
these investments are set out in note 24 
to the financial statements. The Board’s 
policy prohibits personal investments by 
the Non-executive Directors in any of the 
Group’s portfolio companies, whether 
new or existing.

Non-executive Directors are required 
to obtain the approval of the 
Chairman before taking on any further 
appointments and the Chairman requires 
the approval of the Board before adding 
to his commitments. In all cases, the 
directors must ensure that their external 
appointments do not involve excessive 
time commitment or cause a conflict of 
interest. 

The roles of Chairman and  
Chief Executive
Bruce Smith is the Chairman. The 
division of responsibilities between the 
Chairman and the Chief Executive Officer 
is clearly established, set out in writing 
and agreed by the Board. The Chairman 
is responsible for the leadership and 
conduct of the Board, the conduct of 
the Group’s affairs and strategy and for 
ensuring effective communication with 
shareholders. The Chairman facilitates 
the full and effective contribution of 
Non-executive Directors at Board and 
Committee meetings, ensures that they 
are kept well informed and ensures a 
constructive relationship between the 
Executive Directors and Non-executive 
Directors. The Chairman also ensures 
that the membership of the Board is 
appropriate to the needs of the business 
and that the Board committees carry 
out their duties, including reporting back 
to the Board either orally or in writing 
following their meetings at the next Board 
meeting, depending on its proximity to 
the meeting of the relevant committee. 

The role of the Chief Executive is to 
lead the delivery of the strategy and the 
executive management of the Group 
and its operating businesses. He is 
responsible, amongst other things, for 
the development and implementation 
of strategy and processes which enable 
the Group to meet the requirements 
of shareholders, for delivering the 
operating plans and budgets for the 
Group’s businesses, monitoring business 
performance against key performance 
indicators (KPIs) and reporting on these 
to the Board and for providing the 
appropriate environment to recruit, 
engage, retain and develop the high 
quality personnel needed to deliver the 
Group’s strategy. 

Senior Independent Director
Mike Humphrey was the Senior 
Independent Director throughout 
2013. A key responsibility of the Senior 
Independent Director is to be available to 
shareholders in the event that they may 
feel it inappropriate to relay views through 
the Chairman or Chief Executive. In 
addition, the Senior Independent Director 
serves as an intermediary between the 
rest of the Board and the Chairman 
where necessary and takes the lead 
when the Non-executive Directors assess 
the Chairman’s performance and when 
the appointment of a new Chairman 
is considered. Further, the Senior 
Independent Director will lead the Board 
in their deliberations on any matters on 
which the Chairman is conflicted. 

Board support
The Company Secretary is responsible to 
the Board for ensuring Board procedures 
are followed, applicable rules and 
regulations are complied with and that 
the Board is advised on governance 
matters and relevant regulatory 
matters. All directors have access to 
the impartial advice and services of the 
Company Secretary. There is also an 
agreed procedure for directors to take 
independent professional advice at the 
Company’s expense. In accordance with 
the Company’s Articles of Association, 
directors have been granted an indemnity 
issued by the Company to the extent 
permitted by law in respect of liabilities 
incurred as a result of their office. 
The indemnity would not provide any 
coverage where a director is proved to 
have acted fraudulently or dishonestly. 
The Company has also arranged 
appropriate insurance cover in respect 
of legal action against its directors and 
officers.

Board meetings and decisions
The Board meets regularly during the 
year, as well as on an ad hoc basis as 
required by business need. The Board 
had seven scheduled Board meetings 
in 2013. In addition to these scheduled 
Board meetings, the Board also had a day 
together in July 2013 devoted entirely to 
the Group’s strategic objectives, which 
provided an opportunity for all Directors 
and particularly the Non-executive 
Directors to ensure the Group’s strategy 
is on course, to discuss medium and 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

44

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
longer term strategic objectives and 
the key drivers underpinning these, to 
review the Group’s KPIs and to analyse 
and challenge its objectives. Further, in 
connection with the proposed acquisition 
of Fusion IP plc and the Group’s £100m 
capital raising, three conference calls of 
the Board were held through November 
and December 2013 to discuss the 
merits and terms of the transaction and 
to give the Board approval for the Group 
to proceed. All of the directors were 
present for each of these calls, despite 
them being called on relatively short 
notice. The Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors also met without the presence 
of the Executive Directors twice during 
the year. 

The schedule of Board and Committee 
meetings each year is, so far as is 
possible, determined before the 
commencement of that year and all 
Directors or, if appropriate, all Committee 
members are expected to attend each 
meeting. Supplementary meetings of the 
Board and/or the Committees are held 
as and when necessary. Each member 
of the Board receives in advance of each 
scheduled meeting detailed Board packs, 
which include an agenda based upon 
the schedule of matters reserved for its 
approval and appropriate reports and 
briefing papers. If a director is unable 
to attend a meeting due to exceptional 
circumstances, he or she will still receive 
the supporting papers and will usually 
discuss any matters he or she wishes to 
raise with the Chairman in advance of the 
meeting. The Chairman, Chief Executive, 

Chief Financial Officer and Company 
Secretary work together to ensure that 
the Directors receive relevant information 
to enable them to discharge their duties 
and that such information is accurate, 
timely and clear. This information 
includes monthly management accounts 
containing analysis of performance 
against budget and other forecasts. 
Additional information is provided as 
appropriate or if requested. At each 
meeting, the Board receives information, 
reports and presentations from the Chief 
Executive, the other Executive Directors 
and, by invitation, other members of 
senior management as required. This 
ensures that all Directors are aware 
of, and are in a position to monitor 
effectively, the overall performance 
of the Group, its development and 
implementation of strategy and its 
management of risk. 

Board and committee attendance
The following table shows the attendance of directors at meetings of the Board, Audit, Remuneration and Nomination Committees 
during the year:

Scheduled  
Board Meetings

Board  
calls

Audit  
Committee

Remuneration 
Committee

Nomination
Committee

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

Bruce Smith

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward

Francis Carpenter

Jonathan Brooks

Mike Humphrey

Alison Fielding

Graham Richards

1.  Bruce Smith was unable to attend the December Board meeting as a result of a knee operation. 

2.  Greg Smith was on paternity leave at the time of the May Board meeting. 

3.  Alison Fielding stepped down from the Board due to personal reasons with effect from 30 June 2013.

4.  Graham Richards retired from the Board with effect from 14 May 2013.

Key:

Attended

Unattended

45

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Corporate Governance
continued

Strong governance:  
a comprehensive 
induction process is in 
place for new directors

Any matter requiring a decision by 
the Board is supported by a paper 
analysing the relevant aspects of the 
proposal including costs, benefits, 
potential risks involved and proposed 
executive management action and 
recommendation.

The majority of Board meetings are held 
at the Group’s offices in London, which 
gives members of the Group’s client 
service team the opportunity to formally 
present to the Board on new spin-out 
opportunities or early-stage portfolio 
companies on which they are working. 
This assists the Board in gaining a deeper 
understanding of the breadth, stage of 
development and diversity of the Group’s 
portfolio. The Board also aims to have 
at least one of its scheduled meetings 
or its annual strategy day at either the 
Company’s offices in Leeds, Oxford or 
Newcastle or at the location of one of 
the Group’s partner universities in order 
to encourage further interaction with the 
Group’s stakeholders. Meetings between 
the Chairman and Non-executive 
Directors, both with and without the 
presence of the Chief Executive, are also 
held as the need arises. 

Directors’ conflicts of interest
Each director has a statutory duty under 
the Companies Act 2006 (the “CA 2006”) 
to avoid a situation in which he has or 
can have a direct or indirect interest 
that conflicts or may potentially conflict 
with the interests of the Company. This 
duty is in addition to the continuing duty 
that a director owes to the Company to 
disclose to the Board any transaction 
or arrangement under consideration by 
the Company in which he is interested. 
The Company’s Articles of Association 
permit the Board to authorise conflicts or 
potential conflicts of interest. The Board 

has established procedures for managing 
and, where appropriate, authorising any 
such conflicts or potential conflicts of 
interest. It is a recurring agenda item at 
all Board meetings and this gives the 
directors the opportunity to raise at the 
beginning of every Board meeting any 
actual of potential conflict of interests 
that they may have on the matters to be 
discussed, or to update the Board on any 
change to a previous conflict of interest 
already declared. In deciding whether 
to authorise any conflict, the directors 
must have regard to their general duties 
under the CA 2006 and their overriding 
obligation to act in a way they consider, in 
good faith, will be most likely to promote 
the Company’s success. In addition, the 
directors are able to impose limits or 
conditions when giving authorisation 
to a conflict or potential conflict of 
interest if they think this is appropriate. 
The authorisation of any conflict matter, 
and the terms of any authorisation, may 
be reviewed by the Board at any time. 
The Board believes that the procedures 
established to deal with conflicts of 
interest are operating effectively.

Induction, awareness and 
development
A comprehensive induction process is in 
place for new directors. The programme 
is tailored to the needs of each individual 
director and agreed with him or her 
so that he or she can gain a better 
understanding of the Group and its 
businesses. This will generally include an 
overview of the Group and its businesses, 
structure, functions and strategic aims; 
site visits to the Group’s head office 
in London and to one or more of its 
nationwide offices in Leeds, Oxford and 
Newcastle; and site visits to a number 
of the Group’s portfolio companies, 

including one or more within the Group’s 
top ten holdings (by value), which will 
include meeting with such companies’ 
management and a presentation from 
them on their businesses. In addition, 
the Company facilitates sessions as 
appropriate with the Group’s advisers, in 
particular its sponsor Numis Securities 
Limited, as well as with appropriate 
governances specialists, to ensure that 
any new directors are fully aware of 
and understand their responsibilities 
and obligations as a director of a FTSE 
350 company and of the governance 
framework within which they must 
operate. 

In order to ensure that directors continue 
to further their understanding of the 
issues facing the Group, the Chairman 
and Non-executive Directors are 
encouraged to continue to visit the 
Group’s offices other than the main 
corporate office in London, its portfolio 
companies and its partner universities. 
In addition, at least one of the Group’s 
Board meetings or its strategy day will 
be off-site to facilitate this through 2014 
and, as detailed above, the Board is also 
exposed to the early-stage opportunities 
in which the Group has invested through 
presentations at Board meetings by 
relevant members of the Group’s staff. 
It is also intended that, through 2014, 
other function heads (such as the head 
of IP Exec, IP Impact, Communications 
and Business Support) will present 
to the Board to enhance the Board’s 
awareness of how the Group operates 
on a day-to-day basis and how such 
functions operate so as to assist in the 
execution of the Group’s core strategy of 
systematically helping create, build and 
support outstanding intellectual property-
based businesses.

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

46

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
Board and  
Committee evaluation

2013
&2016

Internally
facilitated

2012
&2015

Externally
facilitated

2014
&2017

Internally
facilitated

Critical to the success of the Board and its 
Committees in achieving their aims is the 
effectiveness with which they operate. In 
accordance with the Code, the Company 
operates a three-year cycle for externally 
facilitated evaluations as set out above. 

A summary of our internally facilitated 2013 
Board and Committee evaluation process 
and its main outcomes is set out below.

As a further aspect of their ongoing 
development, each director also receives 
feedback on his or her performance 
following the Board’s performance 
evaluation in each year and, through the 
Company Secretary, access is facilitated 
to relevant training and development 
opportunities including those relevant to 
the Non-executive Directors’ membership 
on the Board’s committees.

Board effectiveness and 
performance evaluation
A performance evaluation of the Board 
and its Committees is carried out annually 
to ensure that they continue to be 
effective and that each of the directors 
demonstrates commitment to his or her 
respective role and has sufficient time 
to meet his or her commitment to the 
Company. Having sought the assistance 
of an independent third party provider in 
its 2012 evaluation in compliance with 
the Code, the Board has carried out an 
internally facilitated board evaluation for 
2013 which was led by the Chairman, 
assisted by the Company Secretary, 
and which covered the effectiveness 
of the Board as a whole, its individual 
directors and its Committees. This 
review included each of the Board and 
Committee members completing a 
detailed and tailored online survey and 

one-to-one discussions between the 
Chairman and each of the individual 
directors. A summary of the results of the 
review, together with the Chairman and 
Company Secretary’s observations and 
recommendations, was prepared and 
shared with members of the Board. The 
main outcome of the evaluation this year 
was for the Board to continue to enhance 
its approach to strategy planning, both 
in respect of the short to medium term 
as well as longer term objectives for 
the Group and to continue to focus on 
succession planning, both at Board level 
and in other key areas of the business 

In addition to the above, the Non-
executive Directors, led by the Senior 
Independent Director, appraised the 
Chairman’s performance, following 
which the Senior Independent Director 
provided feedback to the Chairman. The 
performance of each of the directors on 
the Board was reviewed by the Chairman 
and the operational performance of the 
other Executive Directors was reviewed 
by the Chief Executive as part of the 
annual appraisal process. In addition to 
the aforementioned annual reviews, the 
performance of Executive Directors is 
reviewed by the Board on an ongoing 
basis, as deemed necessary, in the 
absence of the Executive Director under 
review.

Committees of the Board
The composition of the three committees 
of the Board and the attendance of the 
members throughout the year is set out 
in the diagram on page 45.

Remuneration and  
Audit Committees
Separate reports on the role, 
composition, responsibilities and 
operation of the Remuneration 
Committee and the Audit Committee  
are set out on pages 53 to 70 and  
pages 71 to 73 respectively.

Nomination Committee
The Nomination Committee leads 
the process for Board appointments, 
re-election and succession of directors 
and the Chairman. Its key objective is 
to ensure that the Board comprises 
individuals with the necessary skills, 
knowledge and experience to ensure that 
it is effective in discharging its duties. It is 
responsible for making recommendations 

to the Board concerning the composition 
and skills of the Board including any 
changes considered necessary in the 
identification and nomination of new 
directors, the reappointment of existing 
directors and the appointment of 
members to the Board’s committees. 
It also assesses the roles of the existing 
directors in office to ensure there 
continues to be a balanced Board in 
terms of skills, knowledge, experience 
and diversity. The Nomination Committee 
reviews the senior leadership needs of the 
Group to enable it to compete effectively 
in the marketplace. The Nomination 
Committee also advises the Board 
on succession planning for Executive 
Director appointments although the 
Board itself is responsible for succession 
generally. 

The Committee is chaired by Bruce Smith 
and its other members as at 31 December 
2013 were Francis Carpenter, Jonathan 
Brooks and Mike Humphrey, being a 
majority of independent Non-executive 
Directors as prescribed by the Code. The 
Nomination Committee meets as and 
when required or requested by the Board 
and met four times during 2013 to review 
the structure, size and composition of 
the Board, following which it discussed 
the conclusions with the Chief Executive. 
The attendance by each member of the 
Committee is set out on page 45.

Before selecting new appointees to 
the Board, the Nomination Committee 
considers the balance, skill, knowledge, 
independence, diversity (including 
gender) and experience on the Board 
to ensure that a suitable balance is 
maintained (see paragraph headed 
“Diversity” on page 43 for further 
explanation on the considerations made 
by the Committee in this regard). The 
Committee adopts a formal, rigorous 
and transparent procedure for the 
appointment of new directors to the 
Board. Consideration is always given as 
to whether identified candidates have 
enough time available to devote to the 
role. When searching for appropriate 
candidates, the Committee will give 
consideration to using an external 
search company but, given the in-depth 
skill, knowledge and experience of 
the Group’s internal executive search 
function, IP Exec, may elect to use 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

47

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Corporate Governance
continued

this function and will also consider 
candidates who are proposed by existing 
Board members or employees of the 
Group. When the Committee has found 
a suitable candidate, the Chairman of 
the Committee will make a proposal to 
the whole Board and the appointment 
is the responsibility of the whole Board 
following recommendation from the 
Committee.

During the year, Professor Graham 
Richards retired as a Non-executive 
Director with effect from the Company’s 
2013 Annual General Meeting. The Board 
as a whole debated the criteria for an 
additional Non-executive Director to fill 
the vacancy left by Professor Richards 
and it was agreed that the key criterion for 
the role was for the individual to possess 
outstanding academic credentials. 
The Nomination Committee gave due 
consideration to using the services of 
an external search agency but, for the 
reasons identified above, elected to use 
the Group’s in-house resource, IP Exec, 
to source and then shortlist candidates 
together with the Chief Executive and 
the Chairman of the Committee. The 
Nomination Committee members 
each interviewed the candidates who 
had been shortlisted, the outcome of 
which was a recommendation from 
the Chairman of the Committee to the 
Board for the appointment of Professor 
Lynn Gladden CBE as an additional 
Non-executive Director of the Company 
on the basis that she met the criteria 
required, including having sufficient time 
to discharge the requirements of the 
role. Professor Gladden was formally 
appointed as a Non-executive Director 
with effect from 26 March 2014.

In the year ahead, the Nomination 
Committee will continue to assess the 
Board’s size and composition and how it 
may be enhanced.

Internal control
The Board fully recognises the 
importance of the guidance contained in 
Internal Control: Guidance for Directors 
on the Code (“Turnbull’). The Group’s 
internal controls, which were Group-
wide, were in place during the whole of 
2013 and were reviewed by the Board 
of Directors and were considered to be 
effective throughout the year ended  
31 December 2013. 

The Board is responsible for establishing 
and monitoring internal control systems 
and for reviewing the effectiveness 
of these systems. The Board views 
the effective operation of a rigorous 
system of internal control as critical to 
the success of the Group; however, 
it recognises that such systems can 
provide only reasonable and not absolute 
assurance against material misstatement 
or loss. The key elements of the Group’s 
internal control system, all of which 
have been in place during the financial 
year and up to the date these financial 
statements were approved, are as follows:

Control environment and 
procedures
The Group has a clear organisational 
structure with defined responsibilities and 
accountabilities. It adopts the highest 
values surrounding quality, integrity and 
ethics, and these values are documented 
and communicated clearly throughout 
the whole organisation. 

Detailed written policies and procedures 
have been established covering key 
operating and compliance risk areas. 
These are reviewed and updated at 
least annually by the Board. The Board 
considers that the controls have  
been effective for the year ended  
31 December 2013.

Identification and evaluation of risks
The Board actively identifies and evaluates 
the risks inherent in the business, and 
ensures that appropriate controls and 
procedures are in place to manage these 
risks. Specifically, all decisions relating 
to strategic partnerships and other 
collaborations and acquisitions entered 
into by the Group are reserved for the 
Board’s review and approval. The Board 
formally reviews the performance of the 
Group’s university partnerships and other 
strategic collaborations and relationships 
and equity investments on a quarterly 
basis, although performance of specific 
investments may be reviewed more 
frequently if deemed appropriate. The 
Board maintains an up to date Register 
of Risks setting out mitigations in place in 
each case. The key risks and uncertainties 
faced by the Group, as well as the 
relevant mitigations, are set out on pages 
34 to 37.

Information and financial reporting 
systems
The Group evaluates and manages 
significant risks associated with the 
process for preparing consolidated 
accounts by having in place systems 
and controls that ensure adequate 
accounting records are maintained and 
transactions are recorded accurately and 
fairly to permit the preparation of financial 
statements in accordance with IFRS. The 
Board approves the annual operating 
budgets and each month receives details 
of actual performance measured against 
the budget. 

Principal risks and uncertainties
The operations of the Group and the 
implementation of its objectives and 
strategy are subject to a number of key 
risks and uncertainties. Risks are formally 
reviewed by the Board at least annually 
and appropriate procedures are put 
in place to monitor and, to the extent 
possible, mitigate these risks. Were more 
than one of the risks to occur together, 
the overall impact on the Group may be 
compounded. A summary of the key risks 
affecting the Group and the steps taken 
to manage these is set out on pages  
32 to 37.

Relations with stakeholders
The Company is committed to a 
continuous dialogue with shareholders as 
it believes that it is essential to ensure a 
greater understanding of and confidence 
amongst its shareholders in the medium 
and longer term strategy of the Group 
and in the Board’s ability to oversee its 
implementation. It is the responsibility 
of the Board as a whole to ensure that 
a satisfactory dialogue does take place. 
The Board’s primary shareholder contact 
is through the Chairman, Chief Executive 
Officer, Chief Investment Officer and 
the Chief Financial Officer. The Board’s 
primary contact with the limited partners 
and advisory boards of its managed funds 
is through the Managing Director of Top 
Technology and the Chief Executive 
Officer. The Senior Independent Director 
and other directors, as appropriate, 
make themselves available for contact 
with major shareholders and other 
stakeholders in order to understand their 
issues and concerns. Where considered 
appropriate, major institutional 
shareholders are consulted on significant 

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

48

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
changes to the structure of the Executive 
Directors’ remuneration; as described 
further in the Remuneration Report, the 
Remuneration Committee undertook a 
detailed consultation exercise with the 
Group’s top ten shareholders through 
2013 on the proposed changes to the 
remuneration of the Executive Directors.

The Company uses the Annual 
General Meeting as an opportunity to 
communicate with its shareholders. 
Notice of the Annual General Meeting, 
which will be held at 2.00pm on  
13 May 2014 at IP Group plc, 24 Cornhill, 
London, EC3V 3ND, is enclosed with this 
report. In line with the Code, the Notice 
of AGM will be sent to shareholders at 
least 20 working days before the meeting. 
Details of the resolutions and the 
explanatory notes thereto are included 
with the Notice. To ensure compliance 
with the Code, the Board proposes 
separate resolutions for each issue and 
proxy forms allow shareholders who are 
unable to attend the AGM to vote for or 
against or to withhold their vote on each 
resolution. The results of all proxy voting 
is published on the Group’s website 
after the meeting and at the meeting 
itself to those shareholders who attend. 
Shareholders who attend the AGM will 
have the opportunity to ask questions and 
all directors are expected to be available 
to take questions. 

The Group’s website www.ipgroupplc.com 
is the primary source of information on the 
Group. The website includes an overview 
of the activities of the Group, details 
of its portfolio companies and its key 
university partnerships and other strategic 
collaborators, and details of all recent 
Group and portfolio announcements.

Political expenditure
Although it is the Board’s policy not to 
incur political expenditure or otherwise 
make cash contributions to political 
parties and it has no intention of 
changing that policy, the CA 2006 is 
very broadly drafted in this area and the 
Board is concerned that it may include 
activities such as funding conferences 
or supporting certain bodies involved 
in policy review and law reform. 
Accordingly, at the AGM held on 14 
May 2013, the shareholders passed a 
resolution on a precautionary basis to 
authorise the Group to incur political 
expenditure (as defined in Section 365 of 
CA 2006) not exceeding £50,000 in total 
at any time from 14 May 2013 up to the 
conclusion of the 2014 AGM. The Board 
intends to seek renewed authority for 
the Group to incur political expenditure 
of not more than £50,000 in total at 
the Company’s AGM, to be held on 13 
May 2014, which they might otherwise 
be prohibited from making or incurring 
under the terms of CA 2006.

Going concern
The Directors confirm that they have 
a reasonable expectation that the 
Group will have adequate resources to 
continue in operational existence for 
the foreseeable future and accordingly 
they continue to adopt the going 
concern basis in preparing the financial 
statements.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman
3 March 2014

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

i

w
e
v
r
e
v
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

49

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Sustainability

Policy statement

IP Group aims to conduct its business in a socially responsible manner, to 
contribute to the communities in which it operates and to respect the needs of its 
employees and all of its stakeholders.

The Group is committed to growing the business while ensuring a safe 
environment for employees as well as minimising the overall impact on the 
environment.

IP Group endeavours to conduct its business in accordance with established best 
practice, to be a responsible employer and to adopt values and standards designed 
to help guide staff in their conduct and business relationships.

Greg Smith  Chief Financial Officer

Our commitment to the 
environment and sustainability
Having fewer than 40 employees 
operating out of four main locations, we 
consider the direct environmental impact 
of the Group as relatively low. However, 
we firmly recognise our responsibility 
to ensure that our business operates 
in an environmentally responsible and 
sustainable manner. While the Board as 
a whole has primary responsibility for 
environmental issues, it has allocated 
day-to-day responsibility for the review 
of environmental and social issues to the 
Chief Financial Officer, Greg Smith.

This section includes our mandatory 
reporting of greenhouse gas emissions, 
as well as wider details on the Group’s 
environmental impact. The reporting 
period for emissions and waste 
production is the same as the Group’s 
fiscal year.

Organisation boundary and scope 
of emissions
We have reported on all of the emission 
sources required under the Companies 
Act 2006 (Strategic Report and Directors’ 
Reports) Regulations 2013. These sources 
fall within our consolidated financial 
statement. An operational control 
approach has been used in order to 
define our organisation boundary and 
determine the emissions for which 
the Group is responsible and are to be 
included in the scope 1 and 2 emissions. 
Though this excludes any emissions 
from our investment portfolio of spin-out 
companies, management believes this 

y
t
i
l
i

i

b
a
n
a
t
s
u
S

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

50

approach best captures the emissions for 
which the Group is directly responsible 
and has control over. We also report on 
a number of scope 3 emissions (such as 
commuting or business travel), where the 
Group has no control or is not directly 
responsible, but it is recognised that these 
arise as an immediate by-product of IP 
Group’s operating activities.

The table opposite details the breakdown 
of the Group’s greenhouse gas emissions 
split by scope, as well as the Group’s 
production of waste. The Group’s scope1 
emissions primarily consist of natural 
gas used for heating, while all scope2 
emissions are from the purchase of 
electricity (2013: 168.7MWh). The scope3 
emissions opposite include emissions 
due to business travel, the commuting of 
employees and the use of couriers. The 
proportions of these emissions can be 
seen in the chart overleaf.

The emissions and waste production 
reported opposite excludes IPG’s new 
US operations. Given the early stage and 
current scale of the US operations, these 
are considered immaterial to the Group.

Methodology
As was the case in 2012, the Group again 
employed the services of a specialist 
adviser, Verco, to evaluate and quantify 
GHG emissions and the waste production 
associated with the Group’s operations.

The follow methodology was applied by 
Verco in the preparation and presentation 
of this data:

•	 use of the Greenhouse Gas Protocol 
published by the World Business 
Council for Sustainable Development 
and the World Resources Institute (the 
“WBCSD/WRI GHG Protocol”); 

•	 application of Defra emission factors 
to the Group’s activities to calculate 
GHG emissions;

•	

inclusion of all the applicable Kyoto 
gases, expressed in carbon dioxide 
equivalents, or CO2e; and

•	 presentation of gross emissions as 

the Group does not purchase carbon 
credits (or equivalents).

Intensity ratio
As well as reporting the absolute 
emissions, the Group’s GHG emissions 
are reported opposite on the metrics of 
tonnes of CO2e per employee and per 
square metre of office space, these being 
the most appropriate metrics given that 
the majority of emissions result from the 
operation of the Group’s offices and the 
day-to-day activities of the employees.

Target and baselines
Given the comparatively low GHG impact 
of the Group’s operations, the Group’s 
objective is to maintain or reduce its GHG 
per person and per square metre of office 
space each year and will report each year 
whether it has been successful in this 
regard.

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
Though the Group has previously collected and presented details of emissions, the implementation of the mandatory requirements 
has brought material changes to the methods such that prior year figures are not comparable. Comparatives are therefore not 
presented in the first year of mandatory reporting. 

Tonnes CO2e

Tonnes 
CO2e per 
employee

Tonnes 
CO2e per m2

2013 (39 employees & 763m2 office space)

GHG emissions

Scope 11

Scope 22

Subtotal

Scope 33 

Total GHG emissions 

3.8

75.1

78.9

109.0

187.9

0.10

1.93

2.03

2.79

4.82

0.01

0.10

0.11

0.14

0.25

Waste production

Landfill waste

Recycled waste

Total Waste

1. 

Scope 1 being emissions from the Group’s combustion of fuel and operation of facilities.

2.  Scope 2 being electricity, heat, steam and cooling purchased for the Group’s own use.

3. 

Scope 3 being emissions which the Group is not directly responsible for, but arise as a by-product of its operation.

Tonnes 

Tonnes per 
employee

4.8

0.9

5.7

0.12

0.02

0.14

y
t
i
l
i

i

b
a
n
a
t
s
u
S

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

2%

Breakdown 
of emissions
by Scope

40%

58%

Scope 1

Scope 2

Scope 3

Our business ethics and  
social responsibility
The Group seeks to conduct all of its 
operating and business activities in a 
honest, ethical and socially responsible 
manner. We are committed to acting 
professionally, fairly and with integrity in 
all our business dealings and relationships 
wherever we operate, and for its directors 
and staff to have due regard to the 
interest of all of its stakeholders including 
investors, university partners, employees, 
suppliers and the businesses in which the 
Group invests. 

We take a zero tolerance approach to 
bribery and corruption and implement 
and enforce effective systems to counter 
bribery. The Group is bound by the laws 
of the UK, including the Bribery Act 
2010, and has implemented policies 
and procedures based on such laws. 
All employees who are involved with 
the regulated business of managing 
investment transactions receive 
compliance and anti-money laundering 
training, with periodic refresher courses.

Environment
Understanding the indirect environmental 
impacts of our business activities

Though the Group’s day-to-day operational activities have a relatively limited 
impact on the environment, we do recognise that the more significant impact 
occurs indirectly through the nature and operations of the companies that we 
choose to support with human and financial capital. 

The Group therefore considers it important to establish and nurture businesses 
that comply with existing applicable environmental, ethical and social legislation. 
It is also important that these businesses can demonstrate that an appropriate 
strategy is in place to meet future applicable legislative and regulatory 
requirements and that these businesses can operate to specific industry standards, 
striving for best practice.

Major portfolio themes for IP Group have included, and will continue to include, 
business opportunities focused on developing clean technology, environmental 
improvement and resource efficiency. Further qualitative and quantitative details 
of the Group’s holdings in portfolio companies in the Energy & Renewables, 
Chemicals & Materials, Healthcare and Biotech sectors are detailed in the Portfolio 
review, on pages 14 to 26.

The Group’s management and employees 
are fundamental to our success and as a 
result we are committed to encouraging 
the ongoing development of our staff 
with the aim of maximising the Group’s 
overall performance. Emphasis is placed 
on staff development through work-
based learning, with senior members of 
staff acting as coaches and mentors. The 
Group has continued to employ regular 
all-staff update meetings as the main 
source of employee communication. 

Employee diversity and  
employment policies
The Group seeks to operate as a 
responsible employer and has adopted 
standards which promote corporate 
values designed to help and guide 
employees in their conduct and business 
relationships. The Group seeks to comply 
with all laws, regulations and rules 
applicable to its business and to conduct 
the business in line with applicable 
established best practice. The Group’s 
policy is one of equal opportunity in the 
selection, training, career development 

51

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
Sustainability
continued

and promotion of employees, regardless 
of age, gender, sexual orientation, ethnic 
origin, religion and whether disabled  
or otherwise. For the year ended  
31 December 2013 the Group employed 
an average of 35 employees and 
four Non-executive Directors, and a 
breakdown off staff by gender can 
be seen in the table below. IP Group 
supports the rights of all people as set out 
in the UN Universal Declaration of Human 
Rights and ensures that all transactions 
the Group enters into uphold these 
principles.

Breakdown of staff by gender as at 
date of report
Total Staff: 38 (exc. NEDs)

Female

Male

Staff

53%

47%

Executives and  
Senior Management

Board of Directors

36%

11%

64%

89%

Total Staff (38)

Female

53%

Male

47%

Promotion of health and safety at work 
is an essential responsibility of staff and 
management at all levels. The Chief 
Executive has overall responsibility for 
the implementation of the Group’s health 
and safety policies and procedures. The 
primary purpose of the Group’s health 
and safety policy, which can be located 
through the link below, is to enable all 
members of the Group’s staff to go 
about their everyday business at work 
in the expectation that they can do so 
safely and without risk to their health. 
During the year to 31 December 2013, no 
reportable accidents occurred under UK 
Health and Safety regulations.

Copies of the Group’s policies in relation 
to equal opportunities and diversity, 
health and safety and anti-corruption 
and bribery can be found on the Group’s 
website, www.ipgroupplc.com/csr/
company-policies. 

Total Staff excludes NEDs

Executives and Senior Management (11)

Female

36%

Male

64%

Board of Directors (9)

Female

11%

Male

89%

y
t
i
l
i

i

b
a
n
a
t
s
u
S

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

52

Community investment
Our employees are 
encouraged to consider 
social issues and the 
Group is supportive of 
employees pursuing 
roles with charitable 
organisations. 

IP Group and its members of staff 
have a long history of supporting 
charities and remain committed 
to making charitable donations. 

The Group aims to donate 1% of 
the previous year’s realised profits 
to one or more charities which 
have a particular relevance to IP 
Group’s activities or to members 
of our team. 

The Group’s three chosen 
charities during 2013 were 
Macmillan Cancer Support, a 
charity providing practical, medical 
and financial support for those 
affected by cancer, Dyslexia 
Action, which provides help and 
support to those with dyslexia and 
other specific learning difficulties, 
and Imagineering, which works 
to introduce young people 
of 8-16 years to the exciting 
world of engineering, science 
and technology through fun, 
hands-on activities and personal 
involvement. Further details of 
the activities of these charities are 
set out on the Group’s website 
at www.ipgroupplc.com/csr/
community.

Members of IP Group staff 
raised a total of £10,065 through 
“donate a day” salary sacrifice and 
sponsorship of the Group’s 2013 
Great Glen Way challenge. In line 
with its stated policy, the Group 
made charitable donations of 
£15,000 during 2013 (2012: £nil).

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Statement

On behalf of your Board, I am pleased to present 
our Directors’ Remuneration Report (“DRR”) for the 
year ended 31 December 2013. Shareholders will be 
invited to approve both our Remuneration Policy 
and the Annual Remuneration Report at the Group’s 
AGM to be held on 13 May 2014.

As outlined earlier in this Annual Report, for the 
second consecutive year, the Group’s performance 
has been strong, with progress across many of 
the Group’s portfolio businesses contributing to a 
significant increase in net assets and a reported profit 
before tax of more than £70m, the highest since 
the Group’s formation in 2001. The Group’s share 
price increased by around 40% during the year, from 
119.9p to 169.8p, representing an increase in market 
capitalisation of more than £180m.

Francis Carpenter  Chairman of the Remuneration Committee

Evolution of our  
remuneration framework
During the year, the Committee 
considered how the Group’s remuneration 
and incentive structures should evolve 
to enable the Group to continue to 
attract and retain management and staff 
of the highest quality, whilst retaining 
an appropriate level of entrepreneurial 
culture, and also remaining in accordance 
with best practice for a FTSE 250 listed 
business. This resulted in a number of 
changes for 2013, as set out below. 

IP Group is a business experiencing 
substantial growth and its market 
capitalisation has increased from 
approximately £80m in January 2011 to 
approximately £900m at the date of this 
report. As a result the Committee believes 
it is important to keep remuneration 
arrangements under regular review 
to ensure they continue to evolve to 
support the strategy and circumstances 
of the business. We consulted our major 
shareholders on the changes in 2013 
and would intend to do so for any future 
changes.

Incentive mix for 2013
The Committee determined that it would 
reduce the proportion of total reward 
potential arising from the Group’s LTIP and 
introduce a new annual incentive scheme 
while broadly maintaining the overall 
incentive opportunity. The Committee 
considers that this is most appropriately 
aligned with the Group’s current strategy 
of sourcing and developing technology-
based businesses and seeking to generate 
long term value through the growth in 
value of the Group’s holdings in such 
businesses, while being mindful of the 
Group’s financial performance in each 
twelve month period. 

53

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsNew format Directors’ Remuneration 
Report (“DRR”)
We are proposing a resolution to approve 
our forward-looking Remuneration Policy 
under the new guidelines for the first 
time at our 2014 AGM. I trust that our 
work in this regard, including consultation 
with our largest ten holders and proxy 
voting agents during the first half of 2013, 
has resulted in a policy that meets with 
the approval of our shareholders. Our 
2012 Directors’ Remuneration Report 
received 98% of votes cast in favour at 
our AGM in May 2013 and, while this 
indicated a strong level of support, the 
Group is committed to transparency and 
I welcome the opportunity for continued 
discussion of the Group’s remuneration 
with any shareholder, either at our AGM 
or at any other time during the year.

Francis Carpenter
Chairman of the  
Remuneration Committee
3 March 2014

Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Statement continued

Shareholding guideline
In line with best practice, the Committee 
introduced a formal shareholding 
policy which requires the CEO to hold 
shares equivalent to 2× salary and all 
other executive directors to hold shares 
equivalent to 1.5× salary (see page 67). 

LTIP post-vesting holding period
Further, the Committee determined that 
from the 2013 LTIP awards onwards 
any awards that vest, net of any tax and 
NICs liabilities, will be subject to a further 
holding period. To transition into this new 
framework, the holding period will be 
one year in respect of the 2013 LTIP and 
two years for subsequent awards. During 
the holding period, the Committee can 
claw back shares in the case of intended 
fraud or misconduct by a participant 
that contributes to an error in financial 
information that materially affects the 
Company’s value.

Granting of 2013 LTIP awards
The Committee’s intention had been 
to implement the new incentive 
framework following its consultation 
with shareholders in the first half of 2013. 
However, as a result of the corporate 
activity during the second half of the year 
(culminating in the Group’s recommended 
offer for Fusion IP plc and a capital raising 
in early 2014), there was no appropriate 
opportunity to grant the agreed 2013 LTIP 
awards during the year. The Committee 
has therefore determined that the 2013 
LTIP awards will be granted at the same 
time as the 2014 LTIP awards. The 2013 
LTIP awards will have a face value on grant 
of 100% of salary and will vest in March 
2017, subject to performance over the 
2013-2015 performance period. Vested 
shares will then be subject to an additional 
one year holding period.

Executive directors’ base salaries
Given the recent substantial growth in size 
and scope of the business, the Committee 
recognises that the directors’ salaries are 
considerably below market levels, even 
taking into account our historic approach 
of targeting salaries within a “corridor” of 
lower quartile to median of the relevant 
benchmark. During 2013, salary increases 
for the executive directors were in the 
range 5% to 20% (as communicated in 
consultation with major shareholders). 
For 2014, the CEO and CIO will receive 
increase of 2.5% in line with the wider 
business. The other two executive 
directors will receive increases of 12% and 
16%, reflecting continued progression 
towards market positioning having joined 
the Board relatively recently. Salaries for 
2014 are shown on page 66.

Incentives throughout the business
To further encourage share ownership 
throughout the Group we are seeking 
approval for a sharesave scheme at the 
forthcoming AGM. All staff, including 
executive directors, will be eligible to 
participate in the scheme.

Performance outturns for 2013
Against the backdrop of strong Group 
performance and further alignment of 
the long and short term incentives with 
the Group’s strategy as outlined above, 
the Committee considers that the 
remuneration for the executive directors 
for the year appropriately reflects the 
Group’s performance over the year 
as well as the most recent three-year 
period. The long-term incentive awards 
granted in 2011 will vest in full, with the 
Group having achieved in excess of the 
upper performance targets for both 
“hard” NAV growth and TSR (cumulative 
15% annual growth in both measures), 
as well as significantly outperforming 
the index which acts as an underpin to 
these criteria. Further, the Group’s annual 
financial performance was such that the 
upper 22.5% return on hard net assets 
was exceeded and as a result the full 
annual incentive pool was available for 
allocation by the Committee. 

54

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report
Remuneration Policy

Remuneration policy  
and components
This report sets out the Company’s policy 
on the remuneration of its executive and 
non-executive directors (the “Policy”) 
which will become effective subject to 
approval by shareholders at our AGM on 
13 May 2014. 

Our Policy has been updated following 
a review of the Group’s approach 
to remuneration by the Committee, 
including input from Deloitte LLP and 
Hay Group, and following consultation 
with our top ten shareholders during 
2013. The primary changes to the 
previous policy were to reduce the level 
of LTIP awards that may be made to the 
executive directors and management 

team, to narrow the scope of the LTIP 
from all staff to senior management 
and executive directors, to introduce an 
element of short-term incentive through 
a new annual incentive scheme that 
is available to all staff and to introduce 
formal shareholding guidelines.

In devising the Policy, the Committee 
has based its principles on the fact that 
the overriding strategic objective of the 
Group is to provide capital to, and help 
to build, outstanding businesses based 
on technology innovation. The success 
of the Group over time will primarily 
be a function of three key variables – 
the amount of capital provided to the 
portfolio, the return per annum achieved 
on that capital and the period over which 

it is invested. To achieve this objective, 
the Committee believes that the Group 
needs a structure that has incentive levers 
covering both the short-term (1-3 years) 
and the longer-term (3-5 years) and, 
for those staff most directly connected 
with individual portfolio company 
assets (excluding the Group’s executive 
directors), incentives directly aligned with 
those specific assets, potentially over an 
even longer term (5-10 years). The first 
two levers are currently the most relevant 
for the Group’s executive directors 
and therefore are used as the variable 
elements of the Group’s proposed 
forward-looking remuneration policy. 

Remuneration Policy table
The table below sets out the key components of the Policy for executive directors’ remuneration:

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Salary

To provide an appropriate 
level of fixed cash income to 
attract and retain individuals 
with the personal attributes, 
skills and experience required 
to deliver the Group’s strategy

Generally reviewed annually with 
increases currently effective from 
1 April. 

Base salaries will be set by the 
Committee taking into account:

•	

•	

scale, scope and responsibility 
of the role;

skills and experience of the 
individual;

•	

retention risk;

•	 base salary of other employees;

•	 base salary of individuals 

undertaking similar roles in 
companies of comparable size 
and complexity; and

•	 appropriate market benchmarks.

None, although 
performance of the 
individual is considered 
by the Committee 
when setting and 
reviewing salaries 
annually.

There is no prescribed 
maximum annual salary.

Annual salary increases for 
Executive Directors will not 
normally exceed the average 
increase awarded to other UK-
based employees. 

Increases may be above this 
level in circumstances where 
the Committee considers 
it appropriate, for example 
if there is an increase in the 
scale, scope or responsibility 
of the role or to allow the 
base salary of recently 
appointed executives who are 
appointed on initially lower 
levels of base salary to move 
towards market norms as their 
experience and contribution 
increase.

Where a significant 
discrepancy exists between 
an executive director’s current 
salary and market levels, the 
Committee will normally 
phase any increases over a 
number of years.

The base salaries for the executive directors effective 1 April 2014 are:

Director

Alan Aubrey (CEO)
Mike Townend (CIO)
Greg Smith (CFO)
Charles Winward (MD TTV)

Base salary

£261,000
£232,000
£186,000
£185,000

55

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee Reports 
Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Not applicable

Not applicable

10% of base salary for all 
executive directors in 2013 
and 2014.

No element other than base 
salary is pensionable.

Absolute maximum pension is 
15% of base salary.

The cost of benefits provided 
changes in accordance with 
market conditions and will, 
therefore, determine the 
maximum amount that would 
be paid in the form of benefits 
under the Policy. There is 
therefore no overall maximum 
opportunity under this this 
component of the Policy

One-off benefits, e.g. 
relocation, shall not ordinarily 
exceed 25% of base salary 
other than in exceptional 
circumstances at the 
discretion of the Committee.

Maximum awards under 
all-employee share plans 
would be subject to prevailing 
statutory limits.

Directors’ Remuneration Report
Remuneration Policy continued

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Provide a competitive post-
retirement benefit in a way 
that manages the overall cost 
to the Group in order to retain 
individuals with the personal 
attributes, skills and experience 
required to deliver the Group’s 
strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Contribution to Group Pension 
Plan (defined contribution scheme) 
or to personal pension plan of the 
relevant executive’s choosing or an 
equivalent cash alternative.

Provide a competitive and 
appropriate benefits package 
to assist individuals in carrying 
out their duties effectively and 
to retain individuals with the 
personal attributes, skills and 
experience required to deliver 
the Group’s strategy

Ongoing benefits typically 
comprise, but are not limited to, 
health and travel insurance, income 
protection and life assurance 
and may also comprise a car 
benefit (or cash equivalent) and 
telecommunications such as 
broadband.

The Group also offers certain 
salary sacrifice schemes including 
childcare vouchers, purchase of 
additional holiday and Bike to Work.

Executive directors may also 
participate in any all-employee 
share plans that may be operated 
by the Group from time to time on 
the same terms as other employees

Additional benefits, which may 
include relocation expenses, 
housing allowance or other 
benefits-in-kind, may be provided in 
certain circumstances if considered 
appropriate and reasonable by the 
Committee, including as may be 
required on recruitment.

Pension

Benefits

56

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsComponent

Purpose and link to strategy

How this component of 
remuneration operates

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Annual Incentive 
Scheme (“AIS”)

To provide a simple, 
competitive, performance-
linked annual incentive 
mechanism that will:

•	 attract, retain and 

motivate individuals with 
the required personal 
attributes, skills and 
experience;

•	 provide a real incentive 
to achieve our strategic 
objectives; and

•	 align the interests of 
management and 
shareholders.

The maximum annual level of 
award is 100% of salary

Each year the committee 
determines the maximum 
opportunity for each executive 
director within the above 
Policy limit. The maximum 
opportunity for each director 
in 2014 is set at 100% for the 
CEO and 75% for all other 
executive directors (see the 
Annual Remuneration Report 
on page 63).

Specific targets and 
weightings will vary 
from year-to-year 
in accordance with 
strategic priorities but 
may include targets 
relating to:

•	

relative or absolute 
TSR; 

•	 Hard net assets; 

•	 Financial 

performance;

•	 Appropriate non-

financial measures; 
and

•	 Attainment of 

personal objectives.

Weighting will be 
primarily towards 
Group financial 
performance for 
executive directors.

Performance will 
typically be measured 
over one year

The AIS is reviewed annually prior 
to the start of each financial year to 
ensure the detailed performance 
measures and weightings are 
appropriate and continue to 
support the business strategy. 
Financial and/or non-financial 
performance targets are set at or 
around the start of each financial 
year.

Actual AIS amounts are determined 
via a two-stage process. Firstly, 
performance against the agreed 
metrics is assessed. Secondly, the 
Committee reviews these results in 
the context of underlying business 
performance and the Group’s 
financial position and may adjust the 
stage one outcome at its discretion.

Subject to a suitable minimum 
amount, set by the Committee at 
the start of each year, awards will 
typically be payable 50% in cash and 
50% in IP Group shares. The share 
element is in the form of conditional 
awards of shares or nil-cost options 
(or equivalent at the Committee’s 
discretion) and is subject to further 
time-based vesting over two years 
(50% after year 1 and 50% after  
year 2) although the Committee 
may adjust the % split between  
cash and shares based on the 
financial position of the Group. The  
IP Group shares element shall be  
satisfied by awards of options under  
the deferred bonus share plan 
(“DBSP”) which is being proposed 
for approval by shareholders at the 
Group’s forthcoming AGM.

In the case of intended fraud or 
misconduct by a participant that 
contributes to a significant error in 
financial information, the Company 
will be entitled to claw back the 
value of any cash amount paid 
under the AIS for that year and to 
cancel the vesting of any deferred 
share element, for a period of up 
to three years following the date of 
award or payment.

57

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Policy continued

Component

Purpose and link to strategy

Long-term 
incentive plan 
(“LTIP”)

To provide a competitive, 
performance-linked long-term 
incentive mechanism that will:

•	 attract, retain and 

motivate individuals with 
the required personal 
attributes, skills and 
experience;

•	 provide a real incentive 
to achieve our strategic 
objectives; and

•	 align the interests of 
management and 
shareholders.

How this component of 
remuneration operates

The LTIP is reviewed annually prior 
to the start of each financial year to 
ensure the detailed performance 
measures and weightings are 
appropriate and continue to 
support the business strategy. 
Financial and/or non-financial 
performance targets are set at or 
around the start of each financial 
year.

Awards under the LTIP typically 
comprise conditional awards 
of shares in IP Group (although 
instruments with similar economic 
effect may be used if considered 
appropriate.) 

From the 2013 LTIP awards 
onwards any share awards that vest, 
net of any tax and NICs liabilities, 
are subject to a further holding 
period. The holding period will be 
one year for the 2013 LTIP and two 
years for subsequent awards. 

In the case of intended fraud or 
misconduct by a participant that 
contributes to an error in financial 
information that materially affects 
the Company’s share value, the 
Company will be entitled to reduce 
the number of shares in respect of 
an unvested award and / or claw 
back the value of any shares subject 
to this holding period.

Calculations of the achievement of 
the vesting targets are reviewed and 
approved by the Committee.

Maximum opportunity

Performance metrics

Specific targets may 
vary from year-to-year 
in accordance with 
strategic priorities but 
shall be based on:

Relative or absolute 
TSR; and 

Hard net assets.

These performance 
criteria shall be 
presented in a matrix 
format similar to that 
set out in the Annual 
Remuneration Report.

The level of vesting for 
threshold performance 
is 30% of the 
maximum.

Where absolute TSR is 
used as a performance 
metric, awards may 
be subject to a relative 
performance underpin 
against an appropriate 
benchmark index or 
comparator group.

Performance 
will ordinarily be 
measured based on a 
performance period of 
at least three years.

The maximum annual level of 
award is:

•	

150% of salary for the 
Chief Executive; and

•	 A lower percentage for 

other Executive directors

•	 Each year the committee 
determines the maximum 
opportunity for each 
executive director within 
the below scheme 
limits .The maximum 
opportunity for each 
director in 2013 and 2014 
has been set at:

•	 2013 LTIP: 100% of salary 

for all executives 

•	 2014 LTIP: 100% of salary 

for all executives. 

As described on page 64 of 
the Annual Remuneration 
Report, the Committee has 
determined that the 2013 
LTIP awards (which could not 
be granted in 2013) will be 
granted in 2014. 

The overall maximum 
under the LTIP approved 
by shareholders is 400% of 
salary. However the policy 
limits set out above will 
apply and this plan limit will 
only be used in exceptional 
circumstances (such as a 
buyout on recruitment or in 
the circumstances described 
above regarding the 2013 
LTIP).

58

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsThe Committee reserves the right to 
make any remuneration payments 
and payments for loss of office, 
notwithstanding that they are not in line 
with the Policy set out in the table on the 
previous pages, where the terms of the 
payment were agreed either: (i) before 
the policy came into effect, or (ii) at a 
time when the relevant individual was not 
a director of the Company and, in the 
opinion of the Committee, the payment 
was not in consideration for the individual 
becoming a director of the Company. For 
these purposes “payments” include the 
Committee satisfying awards of variable 
remuneration and, in relation to an award 
over shares, the terms of the payment are 
“agreed” at the time the award is granted.

Differences between the Policy and 
that applied to employees generally
The components of remuneration set 
out on the previous pages for executive 
directors are also applied to the Group’s 
senior management team and differ 
only in values and award maxima. The 
benefits package is typically available 
to all UK members of staff following 
completion of a probationary period, 
with a broadly equivalent package being 
offered to overseas staff. All permanent 
UK staff employed on 1 January each 
year are eligible for an award under the 
AIS in that year (with pro-rated inclusion 
for permanent members joining up 
to 30 June each year), with similar 
arrangements for overseas staff. Members 
of the Group’s wider staff team do not 
participate in the LTIP.

Schemes or arrangements under 
which allocations or awards are no 
longer being made
In addition to the directors’ remuneration 
arrangements, the Group previously 
allocated carried interest in funds 
managed by the Group to executive 
directors and other key staff based 
on their level of involvement and 
contribution of the relevant members of 
the team to the management of the fund, 
as well as their cash contribution to the 
relevant fund (where applicable). No new 
allocations of this kind will be made to 
executive or non-executive directors but 
outstanding allocations will be allowed 
to vest.

Illustration of the application of the Policy 
The value and composition of the executive directors’ remuneration packages for the 
year ending 31 December 2014 at below threshold, threshold and maximum scenarios 
under the Policy are set out in the charts below. The charts depict an estimate of the 
remuneration that could be received by each executive director under the Policy set 
out in this report. 

Each bar is broken down to show how the total under each scenario comprises fixed 
remuneration (salary, pension and benefits), the annual incentive scheme and the LTIP.

CEO policy

CIO policy

Maximum

36%

32%

32%

Maximum

39%

26%

35%

Threshold

67%

15% 18%

Threshold

70%

12% 19%

Minimum

100%

Minimum

100%

£0k

£100k

£200k

£300k

£400k

£500k

£600k

£700k

£800k

£900k

£0k

£100k

£200k

£300k

£400k

£500k

£600k

£700k

Fixed

AIS

LTIP

Fixed

AIS

LTIP

CFO policy

MD TTV policy

Maximum

39%

26%

35%

Maximum

39%

26%

35%

Threshold

69%

12% 19%

Threshold

70%

12% 19%

Minimum

100%

Minimum

100%

£0k

£100k

£200k

£300k

£400k

£500k

£600k

£0k

£100k

£200k

£300k

£400k

£500k

£600k

Fixed

AIS

LTIP

Fixed

AIS

LTIP

Notes:
The basis of calculation for the above graphs and key assumptions used are as follows:

Fixed elements of remuneration

Minimum

Threshold/Target

Maximum

Contracted base salary with effect from 1 April 2014 
(before any deduction for fees received directly 
from portfolio companies)
Estimated cash cost to the company of benefits 
and pension contributions received under the 
remuneration policy

Annual incentive scheme1
(pay-out as % of maximum 
opportunity: CEO 100%, other 
executive directors 75%)

LTIP2
(vesting as % of maximum 
opportunity: 100% all executive 
directors)

0%

0%

25% (opportunity 
based on 
achievement of 
threshold target)

30% (opportunity 
based on 
achievement of 
threshold targets)

100%

100%

1.  As described above, the Group’s annual incentive scheme operates such that any amounts in respect of a 

financial year are only paid in the following financial year (or later years in the case of the 50% deferred into 
shares) following completion of all audit, assurance and approval processes. However, the charts above 
effectively depict the total face value of the bonus that can be earned in respect of the relevant year.

2.  Conditional awards of shares under the Group’s LTIP are made based on a percentage of the participant’s salary 
in face value terms and therefore the above amounts relating to the LTIP component reflect this. Changes in the 
value of those shares over the vesting period are therefore ignored.

59

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee Reports•	

•	

In the case of promotion to executive 
director following an acquisition or 
other business combination, the 
Committee may permit equity-based 
incentive arrangements to continue 
in force if they can be “rolled-up” 
into awards over IP Group shares 
provided the performance and vesting 
conditions are considered appropriate.

In the case of the recruitment of an 
executive at a time of the year when it 
would be inappropriate or not possible 
to provide an LTIP award for that year 
(for instance due to price sensitive 
information or if there is insufficient 
time to assess performance). The 
quantum in respect of the months 
employed during the year may be 
transferred to and amalgamated 
with the subsequent year’s award if 
considered reasonable to do so by the 
Committee.

The Committee will include details of the 
implementation of the Policy in respect of 
any such recruitment to the Board in its 
future Annual Remuneration Reports. 

Service agreements
The executive directors have service 
contracts that commenced on the dates 
set out in the chart opposite and contain 
a contractual notice period of six months 
by either party. The non-executive 
directors have letters of appointment 
that commenced on the dates set out 
in the chart opposite, are generally for 
an initial fixed term of three years, which 
is reviewed and may be extended for a 
further three years, and are terminable on 
three months’ notice by either party. In 
accordance with the Code, all directors 
submit themselves for annual re-election 
by shareholders at each AGM. 

Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Remuneration Policy continued

Development of  
remuneration Policy
Consideration of pay and conditions for 
the wider Group: 
The components of pay across the 
Group’s UK staff are broadly similar with 
only the LTIP from 2013 onwards being 
exclusive to the senior management 
team and the executive directors. The 
Committee considers general pay and 
employment conditions of all employees 
within the Group and is sensitive to 
these, to prevailing market and economic 
conditions and to governance trends 
when assessing the level of salaries and 
remuneration packages of executive 
directors. From a practical perspective, 
the Group has less than 50 members 
of staff and, as a result, the Committee 
currently has the ability to review 
remuneration levels and changes thereto 
across the Group when considering 
base salary increases, bonus maxima 
and award pay-outs for the executive 
directors. No specific consultation in 
respect of remuneration took place with 
employees during the year although the 
Group employed a senior HR consultant 
to discuss various human capital related 
matters with individuals representing 
more than 50% of the Group’s employees 
and the Group’s remuneration policy 
featured during a number of these 
discussions.

Engagement with our shareholders: 
The Committee is committed to an 
ongoing dialogue with shareholders 
and seeks to consult with its significant 
shareholders and the various proxy 
advisory groups when considering 
any major changes to remuneration 
arrangements. Feedback as part of 
any consultation is used to guide 
the Committee in its finalisation of 
the remuneration arrangements 
and their implementation. During 
2013 the Committee carried out a 
consultation in connection with the 
proposed introduction of the AIS and 
a commensurate reduction in the level 
of awards made under the LTIP, the 
proposed levels of executive salary and a 
summary of the Group’s forward-looking 
remuneration policy. No material changes 
were proposed by the parties with whom 
the Committee consulted.

Approach to recruitment 
remuneration 
The Committee will apply the Policy for 
any new executive director recruited 
to the board in respect of all elements 
of forward-looking remuneration. The 
maximum level of variable remuneration 
under the AIS and LTIP that may be 
awarded will be within the usual maxima 
as set out in the Policy (i.e. 100% of salary 
under the AIS and 150% of salary under 
the LTIP). The Committee retains flexibility 
to provide benefits in kind, pensions and 
other allowances, such as relocation, 
education and tax equalisation, required 
in order to recruit the intended candidate.

The Committee may make awards on 
hiring an external candidate to buy out 
remuneration arrangements forfeited 
on leaving a previous employer. In 
doing so the Committee will seek to 
structure buyout awards on a comparable 
basis to awards forfeited, taking into 
account relevant factors including any 
performance conditions attached to 
these awards, the form in which they 
were granted (e.g. cash or shares) and 
the timeframe of awards. It is intended 
that the value awarded would be no 
higher than the expected value of the 
forfeited awards. The Committee would 
seek as far as possible to make such 
buyout awards under the Company’s 
existing share plans but, if necessary, 
may rely on the Listing Rules exemption 
which allows for the grant of awards to 
facilitate, in exceptional circumstances, 
the recruitment of a director. 

Similarly, the policy for a new chairman or 
new non-executive directors would be to 
apply the same remuneration elements as 
apply to existing non-executive directors 
under the Policy. 

In addition to the above principles, the 
following additional considerations may 
be applied as appropriate depending on 
the circumstances:

•	

In the case of internal promotion, 
any existing performance-related 
elements arising from an individual’s 
previous role will continue to be 
honoured under the policy, even if 
they may not otherwise be consistent 
with the policy prevailing when the 
commitment is fulfilled.

60

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsEffective dates of service contracts of the executive directors

2005

2006

2007

2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

Present

2 Jun 2011

14 Oct 2011

31 Aug 2011

14 Oct 2011

26 Mar 2014

will lapse. However, at the discretion of 
the Committee, in certain circumstances 
including but not limited to change of 
control, death, disability, retirement or 
redundancy, the Committee may permit 
some or all of the award to be received 
by the executive director.

The treatment of leavers under the 
Group’s LTIP is determined by the 
rules of the scheme. The Committee 
shall determine the extent to which 
outstanding conditional awards made 
to good leavers (including but not 
limited to those individuals leaving 
due to death, disability, redundancy, 
ill health or any other reason at the 
Committee’s discretion) may vest, 
taking into account the extent to which 
performance conditions have been 
met and the length of the performance 
period completed. Any unvested awards 
made to other leavers will typically lapse. 
Any vested awards that are being held 
by the executive director subject to 
any applicable holding period shall be 
retained by them other than in cases of 
intended fraud or misconduct by them 
that contributes to an error in financial 
information that materially affects the 
Company’s share value.

20 Jan 2005

5 Mar 2007

Alan
Aubrey

Mike
Townend

Greg 
Smith

Charles
Winward

Effective dates of letters of appointment of the non-executive directors

3 Sep 2007

3 Apr 2008

Bruce
Smith

Francis
Carpenter

Jonathan
Brooks

Mike
Humphrey

Lynn
Gladden

Loss of office payments policy
Executive directors’ service contracts 
do not contain any pre-determined 
provisions for compensation in the event 
of early termination. When determining 
termination payments, the Committee 
takes into account a variety of factors, 
including individual and Company 
performance, mitigation of loss (for 
example, through new employment) and 
the relevant director’s length of service. 
Any compensation will be based on 
what would have been earned by way 
of salary, pension entitlement and other 
contractual benefits over the notice 
period.

In the event that a contract is to be 
terminated, and a payment in lieu of 
notice made (if permitted by the terms of 
the contract), payments to the executive 
director may be staged over the notice 
period. During that period the executive 
director must take all reasonable steps 
to obtain alternative employment and 
payments to such executive director by 
the Company will be reduced to reflect 
payments received in respect of that 
alternative employment.

All awards under the Group’s AIS are fully 
discretionary and require the participant 
to be employed (and not under notice) 
at the end of the financial year to which 
the award relates. Ordinarily, should an 
executive director leave following the end 
of the annual performance period but 
prior to the payment of any cash element 
of an AIS award or prior to the vesting 
of any share-based element of an AIS 
award, then the cash award would not 
be payable and any share-based element 

Change of control
The rules of the LTIP provide that, in the 
event of a change of control, awards 
would vest to the extent determined by 
the Committee where the Committee 
considers that the performance 
conditions (or alternative conditions 
that the Committee considers to be 
appropriate and proportionate) are 
satisfied at the date of such event. The 
Committee may allow directors to 
exchange their awards over Company 
shares for awards in shares of the 
acquiring company, provided that the 
terms of the offer allow this.

Any bonuses under the AIS that have 
been deferred into shares (or options) will 
vest in full upon a change of control.

Shareholding policy
While the Committee has always 
encouraged executive directors to hold 
shares in the Group and all executive 
directors currently do so, in order to 
ensure that the interests of the Group’s 
directors are aligned with those of 
Shareholders, the Committee introduced 
the concept of a formal shareholding 
policy in 2013 under which all executive 
directors are expected to build up and 
maintain a personal shareholding in 
the Group. The levels required for each 
executive director are set out in the 
Annual Remuneration Report.

Chairman’s and Non-executive 
directors’ Remuneration
A Committee of the Board comprising the 
chairman and executive directors sets the 
remuneration of non-executive directors. 
The Committee sets the remuneration of 
the Chairman. Fees may comprise a base 
fee with additional fees for other duties 
such as chairmanship of a committee or 
for being senior independent director. 
Each non-executive Director is also 
entitled to reimbursement of necessary 
travel, overnight accommodation (if 
applicable) and other expenses. Non-
executive Directors do not participate 
in any of the Group’s variable incentive 
schemes and are not eligible to join the 
Group’s pension schemes.

61

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report

Single figure for total remuneration (audited)
The following table sets out the single figure for total remuneration for Directors for the financial years ended 31 December 2012  
and 2013.

All £000s

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey3

Alison Fielding4, 5

Mike Townend

Charles Winward6

Greg Smith

Non-executive directors

Bruce Smith

Mike Humphrey

Graham Richards7

Francis Carpenter

Jonathan Brooks

Base salary/fees
2012
2013

Benefits

Pension

2013

2012

2013

2012

Annual Bonus (AIS)1
2012

2013

LTIP2

Total

2013

2012

2013

2012

189

101

222

142

149

62

42

15

41

42

182

213

214

131

132

60

40

37

37

40

4

3

5

4

2

—

—

—

—

—

5

5

4

3

2

—

—

—

—

—

25

11

21

16

14

—

—

—

—

—

24

21

21

14

13

—

—

—

—

—

254

76

170

124

120

—

—

—

—

—

— 1,375

3,046

1,847

3,257

—

524

2,491

715

2,730

— 1,048

2,491

1,466

2,730

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

698

648

845

686

984

933

993

833

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

62

42

15

41

42

60

40

37

37

40

1.  AIS bonus payable in respect of the financial year including the 50% which is deferred into shares over two years at face value at date of award. Further information about how 

the level of 2013 award was determined is provided in the additional disclosures section below.

2.  The 2013 LTIP value is based on the 2011 LTIP award due to vest in March 2014. The value of the award is based on performance to 31 December 2013. Further information 

about the level of vesting is provided in the additional disclosures section below.

3. 

In addition, Alan Aubrey retained board fees in 2013 totalling £60,000 (2012: £58,750) from portfolio companies in which the Group is a shareholder that were deducted from 
his base salary, as described further under “Outside appointments for executive directors” on page 69.

4.  Alison Fielding stepped down from the Board due to ill-health with effect from 30 June 2013 however she remains employed by the Group in a part-time capacity. The 

remuneration information above is presented up to the date of her departure from the Board. Further information on the treatment of her outstanding LTIP awards is described 
further on page 64. 

5. 

6. 

In addition, Alison Fielding retained board fees in 2013 until her retirement from the Group’s board totalling £7,500 (2012: £1,250) from portfolio companies in which the 
Group is a shareholder that were deducted from her base salary, as described further under “Outside appointments for executive directors” on page 69.

In addition, Charles Winward retained board fees in 2013 totalling £13,750 (2012: £12,000) from portfolio companies in which the Group is a shareholder that were deducted 
from his base salary, as described further under “Outside appointments for executive directors” on page 69.

7.  Graham Richards retired from the board with effect from 14 May 2013.

Additional disclosures for single figure for total remuneration table (audited)
Base salary
2013 
Following the consultation process with shareholders during the first half of 2013, the following changes in base salary (before any 
deductions for director fees received directly from Group portfolio companies) were introduced with effect from 1 April 2013:

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Charles Winward

Greg Smith

 former base 
salary
 (2012/13)

new base 
salary 
(2013/14)

£242,156

£254,250

£215,250

£226,000

£143,500

£165,000

£133,250

£160,000

% change

5%

5%

15%

20%

The average increase across all staff, excluding directors, was 9.5% which was generally reflective of a 5% base level with additional 
increases to reflect promotions, increases in role scope and increases in an individual’s skills and experience. The Committee 
considered that some of the directors’ salaries were considerably below “market” which was in part as a result of their salaries being at 
an initially lower level upon joining the Board to reflect their levels of experience. As the executives’ tenure and experience continues 
to grow the Committee has taken steps to increase the base salaries accordingly towards the target salaries of between lower quartile 
and median of the relevant benchmarks.

The Chairman’s and non-executive directors’ fees were increased by 5% with the exception of Francis Carpenter whose fee was 
increased to the same absolute level as the other non-executives, being £37,000 base fees plus £5,000 as chair of the remuneration 
committee.

62

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsAnnual incentive scheme
2013
As described earlier in this report, following consultation with its major shareholders, in 2013 the Group introduced the AIS under 
which all executive directors were eligible for an award. 

The targets for the 2013 AIS were solely financial in nature and were based on annual return on hard net assets (i.e. excluding 
intangibles and the Oxford equity rights asset) which were £236.6m at 1 January 2013, as follows: 
Performance condition

Actual performance

Vesting criteria

Return on Hard NAV

8% return (£18.9m): 25% of maximum opportunity  
(“threshold”)  
22.5% return (£53.2m): 100% of maximum opportunity

33.3% return (£78.9m)

As shown in the table, the financial performance of the Group in 2013 was very strong, with the actual return on hard NAV being 
33.3% and therefore the maximum awards pool was available for allocation by the Committee.

Taking into account various factors, including the company’s year-end cash position and the level of realisations achieved during 
the year, the remuneration committee determined that it would make no amendments to the general policy. Therefore, subject to 
a minimum bonus of £20,000, 50% of any individual’s bonus would be payable in cash and 50% would be deferred into equity and 
that, in line with the scheme rules, these would be subject to deferral as to 50% over one year and 50% over two years with forfeiture 
should the executive director leave the Group within such times. Awards to executive directors are subject to claw-back as set out in 
the Policy.

The Committee considered that the executives should be treated equally in terms of bonus outcome for 2013 given the strong all-
round performance. As a result, the following annual incentive scheme awards apply for the 2013 year: 

•	 CEO: 100% of maximum opportunity for the year (100% of salary); 

•	 CFO: 100% of maximum opportunity for the year (75% of salary); 

•	 CIO: 100% of maximum opportunity for the year (75% of salary); and 

•	 MD of TTV: 100% of maximum opportunity for the year (75% of salary).

2012
The Group did not operate any annual bonus scheme in 2012.

Long-term incentive scheme
2011 LTIP awards due to vest in March 2014
The 2011 LTIP awards were based on the performance of Group’s Hard NAV (the Group’s net assets excluding intangibles and the 
Oxford Equity Rights asset) for the three financial years ending on 31 December 2013 and TSR from date of award to the ordinary 
vesting date, being 31 March 2014. Both performance measures were combined into a matrix format, as per the vesting table below. 
The total award is subject to an underpin based on the relative performance of the Group’s TSR to that of the FTSE Small Cap index, 
which can reduce the awards by up to 50%.

)
.
a
p

.

(

R
S
T

15%

10%

8%

<8%

60%

75%

90%

100%

Performance condition

Target performance

Actual/forecast 
performance

30%

45%

60%

90%

15%

30%

45%

75%

Hard NAV 
(at 31 Dec 2013)

8%: £236.7m
15%: £285.8m

£315.5m
(18.8% p.a. growth)

Annual TSR1
(share price)

8%: 63.0p
15%: 76.0p

156.3p
(61% p.a. growth)

0%

8%

15%

8%

30%

60%

Comparative TSR1

FTSE Small cap
+71%

IP Group
+188%

10%

15%

1.  TSR performance based on quarter to 31 December 2013. Actual performance 

Growth in NAV (p.a.)

period to 31 March 2014

As set out in the above table, the actual performance of the Group in terms of Hard NAV growth was in excess of the upper target 
and, based on the positions as at 31 December 2013 and the date of this report, it appears that the TSR target and the performance 
of the underpin index will also be significantly exceeded at the end of the performance period. As a result of this, it is anticipated that 
100% of the 2011 LTIP awards will vest on 31 March 2014. 

63

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee Reports 
Directors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

2010 LTIP awards that vested in April 2013
The following table sets out the outcomes of the performance measures relating to the 2010 LTIP awards against the vesting criteria. 

Performance condition

Hard NAV(i)

TSR performance (share price)

TOTAL

Vesting criteria

£226.8m: 25%
£267.4m: 50%

60p: 25%
67p: 50%

Actual 
performance

£236.6m

119.9p

Actual vesting

31%

50%

81%

i.  Hard NAV target increased by the net proceeds of the Group’s 2011 placing plus 8%-15% growth from the date of completion of the placing.

As the performance measures were achieved in part, the relevant proportion of the 2010 LTIP awards vested on 16 April 2013. 

2013 awards 
During the first half of 2013, the Committee undertook a consultation with major shareholders on the rebalancing of the incentive 
mix. The Committee’s intention had been to implement the new incentive framework, including granting the agreed 2013 LTIP 
awards, following this consultation. However, as a result of the corporate activity during the second half of the year (culminating in the 
Group’s recommended offer for Fusion IP plc and a capital raising in early 2014), there was no appropriate opportunity to grant the 
agreed 2013 LTIP awards during the year. 

The Committee has therefore determined that the 2013 LTIP awards will be granted at the same time as the 2014 LTIP awards 
(discussed on page 66). As communicated during consultation, the 2013 LTIP award will have a face value of 100% of salary based on 
the share price at date of grant and will vest three years later subject to performance. Any shares that vest (net of tax) shall be subject 
to a further one-year holding period in line with the Policy.

The performance conditions that will apply shall be the same as those used for the 2011 and 2012 awards, i.e. the matrix of TSR and 
Hard NAV growth as shown on page 66. Hard NAV growth will be measured over the three year period to 31 December 2015 (starting 
point: £236.6m) and TSR shall be measured from March 2013 to March 2016 with a one-month average (starting point: 143p). The 
underpin will be with reference to TSR performance against the FTSE 250 over this same period.

Under the new disclosure regulations, there is a requirement to disclose certain details of share awards made during the reporting 
year. Although the 2013 LTIP awards were not technically awarded during 2013, the Committee believes it is appropriate and 
transparent to include the required table on the basis that the 2013 LTIP awards relate to this reporting year. 

Executive Director

Type of interest

Basis of award 
(% salary)

Face value*

Threshold 
vesting**

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Charles Winward

Greg Smith

2013 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2013 LTIP

2013 LTIP

100%

100%

100%

100%

£254k

£226k

£165k

£160k

30%

30%

30%

30%

End of performance period

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

31 Dec 2015 (NAV) / 28 Mar 2016 (TSR)

*  As at the date of this report, these awards have not been made (as described above). The face value represents the value which will be granted when these awards are made in 

2014. The number of shares will be calculated using the share price on grant. 

** Represents threshold vesting against both elements of the performance matrix. Lower vesting is possible if only one element of the matrix is partially met,

Loss of office payments (audited information)
No payments for loss of office were made to past directors during the year. No payments have been made that have not already been 
included in the single figure of remuneration set out earlier in this report.

Remuneration for the Chief Operating Officer who stepped down from the Board in 2013 (audited information)
As described earlier in this report, Alison Fielding stepped down from the Board due to ill-health with effect from 30 June 2013 
however she remains employed by the Group in a part-time capacity. Alison received her base salary, benefits and pension 
contributions to the date of stepping down and then continued to do so at a level commensurate with her new part-time role 
following this date. In addition, in view of her continued employment with the Group, Alison’s outstanding awards under the Group’s 
LTIP remain in force and will vest, or not, in 2014 or 2015 depending on the performance against vesting targets of the awards at 
the relevant time. She will also continue to participate in the LTIP as a member of the senior management team. Alison received no 
additional remuneration as a result of her stepping down from the board.

64

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsChange in remuneration of Chief Executive compared to Group employees
The table below sets out the increase in total remuneration of the Chief Executive and that of our UK employees (excluding directors):
% change in 
benefits  
(exc. pensions) 
2012 to 2013

% change in 
bonus  
2012 to 2013

% change in  
base salary 
2012 to 2013

CEO

UK employees

* The Group did not operate an annual incentive scheme/bonus in 2012

5.0%

9.5%

N/A*

N/A*

(8.9%)

1.7%

Historical executive pay and Group performance 
The table and graph below allow comparison of the total shareholder return of the Group and the CEO remuneration outcomes over 
the last five years. 

The chart below shows the Group’s TSR performance against the performance of the FTSE All Share and FTSE Small Cap indices 
over the five-year period to 31 December 2013. The directors have selected the FTSE All Share and FTSE Small Cap indices as, in their 
opinion, these indices comprise the most relevant equity indices of which the Company was a member during the majority of the 
period in question and against which total shareholder return of IP Group plc should be measured. 

350

300

250

200

150

100

50

0
2008

2009

2010

2011

2012

2013

IP Group

FTSE All Share

FTSE Small Cap

Historical CEO remuneration outcomes
The table below summarises the Chief Executive single figure for total remuneration, annual bonus pay-out and LTIP vesting as a 
percentage of maximum opportunity for the current year and previous four years. 
CEO: Alan Aubrey

2009

2010

2012

2011

20131

CEO single figure of remuneration (£000s)

Annual bonus pay-out (% of maximum)

LTIP vesting (% of maximum)

223

n/a

n/a

193

n/a

0%

209

n/a

n/a

3,257

n/a

81%

1,847

100%

100%

1. 

2013 LTIP vesting is based on the current expectations of the performance targets as discussed on page 63.

Relative spend on pay
The chart below shows the total employee costs, change in “hard” NAV and change in share price from 2012 to 2013.

2012

2013

5.1

315.5

169.8

4.0

236.6

119.9

Total employee costs (£m) +27.5% 

NAV (£m) +28.1%

Share price (p) +41.6%

The information shown in this chart is based on the following:

Total employee pay: Total staff costs from note 8 on page 94, 
including wages and salaries, social security costs, pension and 
share-based payments.

Change in “hard” NAV: change in the Group’s net assets 
excluding goodwill, intangibles and the Oxford Equity Rights 
asset taken from the statement of financial position (page 81)

Returns to shareholders: since the Group does not currently  
pay a dividend, returns to shareholders are represented by  
the change in the Group’s share price over the period from  
31 December 2012 to 31 December 2013.

65

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Statement of implementation of remuneration policy in the following financial year
Salary and fixed components
Effective from 1 April 2014, the base salaries of the executive directors will be: 

Alan Aubrey (CEO)

Mike Townend (CIO)

Charles Winward (MD TTV)

Greg Smith (CFO)

Base salary

Increase

£261,000

2.5% (£6,750)

£232,000

2.5% (£6,000)

£185,000 12% (£20,000)

£186,000 16% (£26,000)

The increases for Alan Aubrey and Mike Townend are in line with the general rate of increase across the business. The increases for 
Charles Winward and Greg Smith reflect increases that, as described earlier in this report, are being phased over a number of years to 
bring the individual closer to a market competitive salary commensurate with their increased experience having both initially joined on 
the Board on lower base salaries. 

Pension and benefits will be in line with the benefits stated in the policy table.

Incentives
There will be no change to the maximum opportunity under our AIS, being set by the Committee at 100% of base salary for the CEO 
and 75% of base salary for the other executive directors. The performance measures shall be unchanged for 2014 and shall be based 
on a minimum return of 8% on the Group’s hard NAV with the maximum awards pool being available for a return of 22.5% or greater. 
It is anticipated that the opening hard NAV will be adjusted upwards to reflect the Group’s capital raising and, assuming completion 
following the accounts date, the acquisition of Fusion IP plc. This will result in opening hard NAV of approximately £460m requiring a 
net return of approximately £37m for any bonus pool to be available and in excess of £100m for the maximum pool to be available. 

The 2014 LTIP awards will be made at the same levels that apply for the 2013 awards, being 100% of base salary for all executive 
directors. Performance will continue to be assessed against growth in hard NAV and TSR performance (with the underpin based on 
relative TSR against the FTSE250) as per the vesting table below. 

)
.
a
p

.

(

R
S
T

15%

10%

8%

<8%

60%

75%

90%

100%

30%

45%

60%

90%

15%

30%

45%

75%

0%

8%

15%

8%

30%

60%

10%

15%

Growth in NAV (p.a.)

Hard NAV growth will be measured over the three year period to 
31 December 2016 with the starting point being the £315.5m at  
31 December 2013 adjusted upwards for the net proceeds of the 
Group’s 2014 new equity issue and, assuming it completes, the 
Group’s acquisition of Fusion IP and TSR shall be measured from 
March 2014 to March 2017 with a one-month average. 

The Committee continues to consider that “hard” profitability 
(which in turn drives the Group’s net asset value growth over 
the longer term) is the most appropriate annual performance 
measure for the Group’s business, and considers that increase in 
hard NAV and TSR continue to be the most appropriate over the 
longer term.

As discussed on page 64, the Committee also intends to grant 
the 2013 LTIP awards during 2014 as it was not possible to grant 
these during 2013. 

Chairman and non-executive directors
With effect from 1 April 2014, the fees of the Chairman will be £65,000 (reflecting a 2.5% increase compared to 2013/14) and the fees 
of the non-executive directors will be £38,000 (reflecting a 2.5% increase compared to 2013/14). Additional fees for chairmanship of a 
board committee or for being senior independent director shall be £7,500 (previously £5,000).

66

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee Reports 
Directors’ shareholdings and share interests (audited information)
As set out in the Policy on pages 55 to 61, the Group has minimum shareholding requirements for each of its executive directors. 

In its consultation with shareholders in the first half of 2013, the levels were proposed as 1.5× salary for the CEO and 1.25× salary for 
all other executive directors. Mindful of evolving best practice however the Committee has determined to set the limits at 2.0× salary 
for the CEO, and 1.5× salary for all other executive directors.

This level of shareholding is required to be met within four years of 1 July 2013 or date of appointment, if later. If the guideline is not 
met within this timeframe then the Committee will discuss with the relevant executive director a plan to ensure that the guideline can 
be met within a reasonable timeframe. The Committee will ordinarily require executive directors to retain all shares received under the 
AIS or LTIP, other than as required to meet tax and NIC liabilities, until the guideline is met.

At the end of the year, all executive directors met this requirement. 

Interests in shares
The directors who held office during 2013 had the following beneficial interests in the ordinary shares of the Company:

Alan Aubrey

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward

Bruce Smith 

Francis Carpenter

Jonathan Brooks

Mike Humphrey

Former directors (interests as at date of leaving the board)

Alison Fielding (stepped down 30 June 2013)

Graham Richards (retired 14 May 2013)

 31 December 2013
Number of shares

2,237,089

910,718

227,685

262,446

236,592

239,151

60,000

80,000

1,051,008

29,250

There have been no changes in the interests of the current executive directors set out above between 31 December 2013 and  
3 March 2014 other than in the case of Mike Humphrey who acquired an additional 3,230 shares on 14 February 2014.

Long-Term Incentive Plan
Directors’ participations in the Group’s LTIP are:

Number 
of shares 
conditionally 
held at 
1 January 2013 

Conditional 
shares notionally 
awarded in the 
year

Vested during 
the year

Lapsed during 
the year

Potential 
conditional interest 
in shares at 
31 December 2013

Share price 
at date of 
conditional 
award
(p)

Earliest vesting 
date(s)

Alan Aubrey

2010 LTIP

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

Mike Townend

2010 LTIP

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

2,556,818

879,654

302,695

3,739,167

2,090,909

670,213

230,625

2,991,747

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(2,071,023)

(485,795)

—

—

—

—

—

879,654

302,695

29

54

31 March 2014

135.5

31 March 2015

(2,071,023)

(485,795)

1,182,349

(1,693,636)

(397,273)

—

—

—

—

—

670,213

230,625

29

54

31 March 2014

135.5

31 March 2015

(1,693,636)

(397,273)

900,838

67

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Number 
of shares 
conditionally 
held at 
1 January 2013 

Conditional 
shares notionally 
awarded in the 
year

Vested during 
the year

Lapsed during 
the year

Potential 
conditional interest 
in shares at 
31 December 2013

Share price 
at date of 
conditional 
award
(p)

Earliest vesting 
date(s)

Greg Smith

2010 LTIP

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

Charles Winward

2010 LTIP

2011 LTIP

2012 LTIP

575,758

414,894

142,768

1,133,420

709,091

446,809

153,750

1,309,650

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(466,364)

(109,394)

—

—

—

—

(466,364)

(109,394)

(574,364)

(134,727)

—

—

—

—

(574,364)

(134,727)

—

414,894

142,768

557,662

—

446,809

153,750

600,559

29

54

31 March 2014

135.5

31 March 2015

29

54

31 March 2014

135.5

31 March 2015

Other long-term interests – legacy arrangements (audited information)
In addition to the executive directors’ remuneration arrangements, the Group also operates co-investment and carried interest 
arrangements relating to certain venture capital funds that are under its management. Under the co-investment arrangements, 
executive directors make minority capital and loan commitments to IP Venture Fund (“IPVF”) alongside the Group. Executives are 
entitled to participate in a carried interest scheme in respect of IPVF and The North East Technology Fund LP alongside the Group. 
Carried interest provides a preferential return to participants once the partnership in question has returned all funds contributed by 
limited partners together with a pre-agreed rate of return. The carried interest and co-investment arrangements will generally contain 
forfeiture provisions in respect of leavers over the investment period of the relevant partnership (typically 5-6 years). 

As described in the Policy, no new allocations of this kind will be made to executive directors in future however the current 
outstanding interests in co-investment and carried interest schemes in connection with the Group’s managed funds are as follows:

IPVF co-investment arrangements
The executive directors’ commitments to, and returns from, IPVF are set out below. Commitments are made indirectly through the  
IP Venture Fund (FP) LP, which is the founder partner of IPVF.

Total commitment
£000

Limited 
partnership 
interest 
of IPVF

Total capital 
contributed to 
1 January 2013 
£000

Capital 
contributions 
during the year
£000

Total capital 
contributions at  
31 December 2013
£000

Capital amounts 
repaid during 
the year
£000

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey

Alison Fielding1

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward

Total

56

56

56

35

56

259

0.18%

0.18%

0.18%

0.11%

0.18%

0.83%

44

44

44

23

44

199

4

4

4

4

4

20

48

48

48

27

48

219

3

3

3

1

3

13

1.  As described earlier in this report, Alison Fielding stepped down from the Board due to ill-health with effect from 30 June 2013 however she remains employed by the Group 

in a part-time capacity and continues to participate in the IPVF co-investment arrangement.

68

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee Reports 
Carried interest arrangements
The executive directors’ interests in carried interest schemes are set out below:

Executive Directors

Alan Aubrey

Alison Fielding(v)

Mike Townend

Greg Smith

Charles Winward

Fund(i)

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

IPVF

NETF

Carried interest(ii)
at 1 January
2013 

Awarded during
 the year

Transferred 
during the year

Lapsed during 
the year

Scheme interest
at
31 December
2013(iii)

Accrued value(iv)
of scheme
interest at
31 December
2013
£000

1.81%

1.55%

1.81%

1.15%

1.81%

1.15%

1.14%

0.85%

1.81%

0.45%

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

1.81%

1.55%

1.81%

1.15%

1.81%

1.15%

1.14%

0.85%

1.81%

0.45%

253

47

253

35

253

35

159

26

253

14

i.  Under the IPVF fund LPA, payments to participants are made when all limited partners have been repaid their contributions together with a hurdle rate of 8% compound 

interest. Under the North East Technology Fund (“NETF”) scheme, payments to participants are made when all limited partners have been repaid their contributions together 
with a hurdle rate of 3.5% compound interest.

ii. 

Scheme interest represents the percentage of the relevant pool of investments in respect of which the participant is entitled to participate in the realised profits.

iii.  The schemes contain forfeiture provisions over the investment period of the fund which may reduce the scheme interest accruing to any participant. The table reflects the 

maximum scheme interest receivable should no forfeiture occur.

iii.  Accrued value of scheme interests is calculated based upon the current fair value of the relevant limited partnership’s assets in excess of the capital contributed and the hurdle 

rate of return. Any payments will only be made following full repayment of limited partners’ loan commitments and the hurdle return and accordingly actual payments under 
the scheme, if any, may be materially different to those set out above.

iv.  As described earlier in this report, Alison Fielding stepped down from the Board due to ill-health with effect from 30 June 2013 however she remains employed by the Group 

in a part-time capacity and continues to participate in the IPVF and NETF carried interest arrangements.

Outside appointments for  
executive directors
Any proposed external directorships 
are considered by the Board to ensure 
they do not cause a conflict of interest 
but, subject to this, executive directors 
may accept a maximum of two outside 
non-executive appointments and indeed 
the Board believes that it is part of 
their ongoing development to do so. 
Where an executive director accepts an 
appointment to the board of a company 
in which the Group is a shareholder, the 
Group generally retains the related fees. 
In the limited circumstances where the 
executive director receives such fees 
directly, such sums are deducted from 
their base salary from the Group. Fees 
earned for directorships of companies 
in which the Group does not have a 
shareholding are normally retained by the 
relevant director.

Limits on the number of shares 
used to satisfy share awards 
(dilution limits)
All of the Group’s incentive schemes that 
contain an element that may be satisfied 
in IP Group shares incorporate provisions 
that in any ten-year period (ending on 
the relevant date of grant), the maximum 
number of the Shares that may be issued 
or issuable under all such schemes shall 
not exceed 10% of the issued ordinary 
share capital of the Company from time 
to time.

The Committee regularly monitors the 
position and prior to the making of any 
share-based award considers the effect 
of potential vesting of outstanding awards 
to ensure that the Company remains 
within these limits. Any awards which 
are required to be satisfied by market 
purchased shares are excluded from  
such calculations. No treasury shares 
were held or utilised in the year ended  
31 December 2013.

As at 31 December 2013, the Company’s 
headroom position, which remains within 
such guidelines, was as shown in the 
chart below:

5.83%

1.73%

0.80%

0.86%

0.78%

Vested LTIP awards in past 10 years - Executives

Vested LTIP awards in past 10 years - Other staff

Outstanding conditional LTIP awards - Executives

Outstanding conditional LTIP awards - Other staff

Additional headroom

69

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ Remuneration Report 
Annual Remuneration Report continued

Consideration by the directors 
of matters relating to directors’ 
remuneration
The full terms of reference of the 
Committee, which are reviewed annually, 
are available on the Group’s website at 
www.ipgroupplc.com. In summary, the 
Remuneration Committee has specific 
responsibility for advising the Group’s 
Board on the remuneration and other 
benefits of executive directors, an overall 
policy in respect of remuneration of other 
employees of the Group and establishing 
the Group’s policy with respect to 
employee incentivisation schemes. 

The Remuneration Committee comprises 
the following independent non-executive 
directors, all of whom served throughout 
the year, and whose backgrounds and 
experience are summarised on page 39:

•	 Francis Carpenter (Chair)

•	 Mike Humphrey

•	 Jonathan Brooks

Committee meetings are administered 
and minuted by the Company Secretary. 
In addition, the Committee received 
assistance from the Chief Financial 
Officer and Chief Executive Officer who 
attend meetings by invitation, except 
when matters relating to their own 
remuneration are being discussed.

During the year, the key activities carried 
out by the Committee were:

•	 Consideration of the Group’s overall 
remuneration structure to ensure it 
continues to promote the Group’s 
strategy, including the blend of fixed 
and short and longer-term variable 
pay.

•	 Consideration of the skills and 

experience of the executive directors 
and carried out benchmarking in order 
to determine base salaries for the 
period 1 April 2013 to 31 March 2014.

•	 Consultation with the Group’s major 
shareholders and proxy advisory 
bodies on the above, including the 
reduction of awards under the Group’s 
LTIP and introduction of an annual 
incentive scheme.

•	 Consideration of the high-level 

remuneration arrangements applicable 
to the Group’s staff, including the 
limitation of the LTIP to management 
and executive directors and Group-
wide introduction of the AIS.

•	 Consideration of LTIP and AIS awards 
and vesting targets for 2013 and 
determining that it was not appropriate 
to make 2013 LTIP awards during the 
year.

•	 Review of the revised remuneration 
reporting regulations including 
the development of the Group’s 
remuneration Policy and preparation 
of the Directors’ Remuneration Report.

External advisers
The Remuneration Committee 
is authorised, if it wishes, to seek 
independent specialist services to provide 
information and advice on remuneration 
at the Company’s expense, including 
attendance at Committee meetings.

During the year the Remuneration 
Committee continued its review of 
executive remuneration and took into 
consideration professional advice from 
Hay Group carried out in 2012 in respect 
of remuneration policy, typical levels of 
remuneration for the industry and sector, 
and on the mix of salary and long-term 
incentives. Fees paid to Hay Group in 
connection with advice to the Committee 
in 2013 were £nil and in 2012 were 
£22,500.

In addition, the Committee utilised 
the services of Deloitte LLP in 2014 
to assist in the development of the 
Group’s Remuneration Policy and its 
reporting under the revised Directors’ 
Remuneration Reporting Regulations. 
Hay Group did not provide any other 
advice or services to the Group during 
the year. Deloitte is a founding member 
of the Remuneration Consultants Group 
and adheres to its Code in relation to 
executive remuneration consulting in  
the UK.

Statement of shareholder voting
The table below sets out the proxy results of the vote on the remuneration report at the Group’s 2013 AGM:

Votes for

Votes against

Total

Total

Number

298,741,696

% of votes cast

Number

% of votes cast

Votes cast

Votes withheld

97.7%

7,120,577

2.3%

305,862,273

2,763,121

Remuneration disclosure
This report complies with the requirements of the Large and Medium-sized Companies and Groups Regulations 2008 as amended in 
2013, the provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code (September 2012) and the Listing Rules.

70

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsReport of the Audit Committee

Audit Committee responsibilities
The Committee monitors the integrity 
of the financial statements of the Group, 
and reviews all proposed annual and half-
yearly results announcements to be made 
by the Group with consideration being 
given to any significant financial reporting 
judgements contained in them. 

The Committee also advises the Board 
on whether it believes the annual report 
and accounts, taken as a whole, is fair, 
balanced and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for shareholders 
to assess the Company’s performance, 
business model and strategy.

The Committee also considers internal 
controls, compliance with legal 
requirements, accounting standards and 
the Listing, Disclosure and Transparency 
Rules of the Financial Conduct Authority, 
and also reviews any proposed 
change in accounting policies and any 
recommendations from the Group’s 
auditor regarding improvements to 
internal controls and the adequacy of 
resources within the Group’s finance 
function. 

A full copy of the Committee’s Terms of 
Reference, which were updated in early 
2013 following an evaluation process, is 
available from the Company’s website at 
www.ipgroupplc.com. 

The Board places a very high priority on the integrity 
of the Group’s financial statements, the quality 
and transparency of its financial reporting and the 
effectiveness of IP Group’s risk management and 
internal control systems. The Audit Committee 
assists the Board in its oversight and governance of 
these critical areas.
Jonathan Brooks  Chairman of the Audit Committee

Committee membership
The Committee comprises three 
independent Non-executive Directors. 
The Committee met four times during the 
year. The CEO, CFO, Financial Controller, 
other members of management and 
the external auditor attend meetings by 
invitation. As the Chair of the Committee, 
I am deemed by the Board to have recent 
and relevant financial experience being 
a Fellow of the Chartered Institute of 
Management Accountants and having 
held senior financial positions in my 
career. In 2013, Mike Humphrey, Senior 
Independent Director, and Francis 
Carpenter were the other two members. 

The Committee meets at least twice 
per annum with the auditor without any 
members of the executive management 
team being present. I also meet with the 
external auditor a few times during the 
year away from the Company’s offices.

Activities during the year
The main activities of the Committee 
during 2013 can be seen by referring 
to the summary agenda items on page 
72. In addition to its normal cycle of 
activities, the Committee undertook three 
additional activities in 2013. These were 
the improvement of governance around 
investment and divestment policies, 
whistleblowing, and a review of FCA 
compliance; secondly a review of the 
Group’s cyber-security policies in the light 
of the BIS initiative; and thirdly, following 
the current audit partner’s completion of 
his 5 year term in 2013, the Committee’s 
decision to tender the 2014 audit and the 
subsequent tender process.

Risk and internal controls
The key elements of the Group’s internal 
control framework and procedures are 
set out on pages 32 and 33. The principal 
risks the Group faces are set out on pages 
34 to 37. Annually, the Audit Committee 
considers the Group risk register 
and related management controls. 
Throughout the process the Board or the 
Audit Committee:

•	 Gives consideration to whether areas 
should be looked at more closely 
through internal audit or specific 
control reviews;

•	

Identifies areas where enhancement 
of internal controls is required; and

•	 Agrees action plans to deliver 

the necessary or recommended 
enhancements.

There is a formal whistleblowing 
policy which has been communicated 
to employees. This policy provides 
information on the process to follow 
in the event that any employee feels 
it is appropriate to make a disclosure. 
The Audit Committee is satisfied that 
the policy provides an adequate basis 
for employees to make representations 
in confidence to the Group and 
for appropriate and proportionate 
investigations.

Valuation of assets and liabilities
The Audit Committee discusses 
with management and the auditor 
the approach that has been taken 
in assessing all key estimates. These 
include the carrying value of intangible 
assets, provisions for impairment of 
intangible assets and the taxation status 
of the Group. Given the nature of the 
Company’s business, this remains an 
extremely important element of the 
annual audit.

71

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsReport of the Audit Committee
continued

Annually, the Committee considers 
the going concern principle on which 
the financial statements are prepared 
and also considers and approves the 
impairment review of goodwill prepared 
by management.

Internal audit
The Group does not maintain a separate 
internal audit function. This is principally 
due to the size of the Group where close 
control over operations is exercised by 
a small number of Executive Directors. 
The Audit Committee currently considers 
the outsourced provision of internal 
audit work as both more efficient and 
cost-effective than having its own central 
internal audit team. However, the Audit 
Committee does review the need to have 
its own separate internal audit function 
each year.

The Audit Committee has developed 
a framework to gain assurance over 
the system of internal financial and 
operational controls. This comprises: 

•	 A risk assessment performed by 

operational management and the 
Board to identify key areas for 
assurance. 

•	 An annual assessment by the Audit 
Committee of the whole system of 
internal financial and operational 
controls.

The Audit Committee considers that a 
key area of risk in the business lies in the 
investment and divestment policies of 
the Group and during 2013 undertook a 
review of these processes. 

Audit committee meeting dates 2013  
and summary agendas

February

August

 — Full year financial statements and 

 — Half year financial statements and 

discussion with auditor

review with auditor

 — Audit committee effectiveness  

 — Tendering the 2014 audit process 

review

 — Going concern review

 — Consideration of the need for a  
formal internal audit function

 — Review of anti-bribery policy and 

procedures

 — Cyber-security

 — Review of risk register

October

May

 — Review of auditor’s 2013 audit planning 

document

 — Auditor effectiveness review

 — Audit committee’s terms of reference; 

 — Planning of internal audit projects

annual review

 — External review of FCA  
authorised business

 — Review of mobile device security

 — Review of MLRO/Compliance officer 
reports from regulated investment 
business

 — Whistleblowing policy; annual review 

of process

 — Investment and divestment policy; 

annual review

 — Development of a related party 

transaction policy

 — Risk Review update

Appointment and Independence
The Audit Committee advises the Board 
on the appointment of the external 
auditor and on its remuneration both for 
audit and non-audit work and discusses 
the nature, scope and results of the audit 
with the external auditor. The Committee 
keeps under review the cost-effectiveness 
and the independence and objectivity 
of the external auditor. Controls in place 
to ensure this include monitoring the 
independence and effectiveness of the 
audit, implementing a policy on the 
engagement of the external auditor to 
supply non-audit services, and a review 
of the scope of the audit and fee and 
performance of the external auditor. 

External audit
The effectiveness of the external audit 
process is dependent on appropriate risk 
identification. In October, the Committee 
discussed the auditor’s audit plan for 
2013. This included a summary of the 
proposed audit scope and a summary 
of what the auditor considered to be 
the most significant financial reporting 
risks facing the Group together with 
the auditor’s proposed audit approach 
to these significant risk areas. The main 
areas of audit focus for the year were the 
carrying value of the Oxford University 
Equity Rights’ asset, a review of the 
carrying values of the Group’s equity 
and debt investments in its portfolio 
companies (with particular focus on 
unquoted companies, including Oxford 
Nanopore Technologies Limited) and 
the continued eligibility of the Group for 
Substantial Shareholder Exemption (“SSE”) 
relief. These were the principal areas of 
financial reporting risk for the Group in 
2013. 

72

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Governance Committee ReportsNon-Audit Work
The Audit Committee approves all fees 
paid to the auditor for non-audit work. 
During the year the auditor did perform 
some non-audit work which mainly 
consisted of tax compliance work for 
subsidiaries of the Group, as well some 
other statutory filing work.

The Group does engage other 
independent firms of accountants to 
perform tax consulting work and other 
consulting engagements to ensure that 
the independence of the auditor is not 
compromised. For example, during 2013, 
external advisers were used to advise 
on certain matters of taxation as well as 
on aspects of the Group’s remuneration 
policies. An analysis of non-audit fees 
is provided in note 6 to the financial 
statements. 

Auditor Independence
A formal statement of independence is 
received from the auditor each year and 
audit partners are rotated every five years. 
The Board and the Audit Committee are 
satisfied that the independence of the 
auditor, originally appointed in 2002, has 
been maintained. However, since the 
current audit partner was in his fifth year, 
the Audit Committee decided in August 
2013 that it would put out the 2014 
audit for tender and engaged in a tender 
process in March 2014. 

Subsequent to the 2013 year end, 
our auditors, BDO LLP, also invoiced 
£150,000 for financial and tax due 
diligence in association with the £100m 
equity capital raising and acquisition 
of Fusion IP plc by the Group. Before 
awarding this work we consulted with 
two other firms of accountants and 
we obtained other estimates of fees. 
Following discussions with our auditors 
to ensure that appropriate safeguards 
were in place and would be implemented 
in accordance with Ethical Standards, I 
agreed that the work should be awarded 
to BDO LLP. 

Auditor Effectiveness
During the year, the Committee assessed 
the effectiveness of the external auditor, 
BDO LLP. This assessment was based 
upon a number of factors including 
reviewing the quality and scope of 
the planning of the audit, individual 
questionnaire feedback from key 
members of the Group’s finance team 
and discussions between the Committee 
members. The overall conclusion was 
that the audit process was effective.

Audit Tender Process
Following informal meetings with six 
major accounting firms in the latter part 
of 2013 and early 2014, the Committee 
decided to invite three firms to tender 
for the Group’s 2014 audit. A Request 
for Proposal (RFP) was recently issued, 
requiring each firm to submit its proposals 
against a number of criteria including 
audit approach and delivery, audit 
quality assurance, the engagement team 
proposed and proposed fees and terms. 
Each firm will be allowed meetings with 
the senior management of the Group and 
it is anticipated that each firm will present 
to the Audit Committee by early April. 
Following the outcome of this process, 
the Committee intends to appoint the 
selected firm to carry out the Group’s 
audit with effect from 2014, including 
providing a review opinion on the Group’s 
half-yearly results to 30 June 2014.

The Audit Committee currently intends 
to recommend to the Board a resolution 
to shareholders to appoint the successful 
firm at the AGM to be held on 13 May 
2014.

I will be available at the AGM to answer 
any questions about the Committee’s 
work.

Jonathan Brooks 
Chairman of the Audit Committee 
3 March 2014

73

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Governance Committee ReportsDirectors’ report

Report of the directors
The directors present their report 
together with the audited financial 
statements for IP Group plc and its 
subsidiaries for the year ended  
31 December 2013.

Corporate governance statement
Information that fulfils the requirements 
of the corporate governance statement 
can be found in the Corporate 
Governance report on pages 40 to 49 
and is incorporated into this Directors’ 
report by reference.

Results and dividends 
During the period, the Group made an 
overall profit after taxation for the year 
ended 31 December 2013 of £72.6m 
(2012: £40.7m profit). The directors 
do not recommend the payment of a 
dividend (2012: £nil). 

Directors
The names of directors who currently 
hold office or did so during 2013 are as 
follows:

Executive Directors
Alan Aubrey 
Alison Fielding (resigned on 30 June 
2013) 
Mike Townend 
Greg Smith 
Charles Winward

Non-executive Directors
Bruce Smith (Chairman) 
Graham Richards (resigned on 14 May 
2013) 
Francis Carpenter 
Jonathan Brooks 
Mike Humphrey 
Dr Lynn Gladden (appointed with effect 
from 26 March 2014)

Details of the interests of directors in the 
share capital of the Company are set out 
in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on 
pages 67 to 68.

y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S

r
e
h
t
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

74

these shares were issued) were issued 
during the period using this authority 
for the purpose of settling the 2010 LTIP 
awards. The directors propose to renew 
these authorities at the Company’s 
next AGM to be held on 13 May 2014. 
The authorities being sought are in 
accordance with guidance issued by the 
Association of British Insurers.

A further special resolution passed at 
the 2013 AGM granted authority to the 
directors to allot equity securities in 
the Company for cash, without regard 
to the pre-emption provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006, both: (i) up to a 
maximum of approximately two-thirds of 
the total ordinary share capital in issue on 
10 April 2013 in connection with a fully 
pre-emptive rights issue; and (ii) up to 
a maximum of approximately 5% of the 
aggregate nominal value of the shares 
in issue on 10 April 2013, each authority 
exercisable at any time up to the earlier 
of the conclusion of the next AGM of the 
Company and 11 August 2014. Neither of 
these authorities has been used during 
the year. The directors will seek to renew 
these authorities for a similar period at the 
next AGM to be held on 13 May 2014.

Under the Companies Act 2006, the 
Company has the power to purchase its 
own shares in accordance with Part 18, 
Chapter 5 of the Companies Act 2006. 
At the 2013 Annual General Meeting, 
a special resolution was passed which 
granted the directors authority to make 
market purchases of the Company’s 
shares pursuant to these provisions of the 
Companies Act 2006 up to a maximum 
of approximately 10% of the Company’s 
issued share capital on 10 April 2013 
provided that the authority granted 
set a minimum and maximum price at 
which purchases can be made and is 
exercisable at any time up to the earlier 
of the conclusion of the next AGM and 11 
August 2014. This authority has not been 
used during the year. The directors will 
seek to renew the authority within similar 
parameters and for a similar period at the 
next AGM to be held on 13 May 2014.

Principal risks and uncertainties 
and financial instruments 
The Group through its operations is 
exposed to a number of risks. The 
Group’s risk management objectives and 
policies are described on pages 32 to 37 
and in the Corporate Governance report 
on pages 40 to 49. Further information 
on the Group’s financial risk management 
objectives and policies, including those 
in relation to credit risk, liquidity risk and 
market risk, is provided in note 2 to the 
consolidated financial statements, along 
with further information on the Group’s 
use of financial instruments.

Significant agreements
The Group has entered into various 
agreements to form partnerships with 
eleven UK universities and two US 
universities, as well as agreements to 
act as general partner and investment 
manager to four limited partnerships. 
Further details can be found in the 
strategic report and in the notes to the 
financial statements.

Share capital and related matters
Details of the structure of the Company’s 
share capital and the rights attaching 
to the Company’s shares are set out in 
note 20 to the consolidated financial 
statements. There are no specific 
restrictions on the size of a holding or 
on the transfer of shares, which are both 
governed by the general provisions of the 
Company’s Articles of Association (the 
“Articles”) and prevailing legislation.

At the last Annual General Meeting of the 
Company, held on 14 May 2013, authority 
was given to the directors pursuant to the 
relevant provisions of the Companies Act 
2006 to allot unissued relevant securities 
in the Company up to a maximum 
amount equivalent to approximately 
one-third of the issued ordinary share 
capital on 10 April 2013 at any time up 
to the earlier of the conclusion of the 
next Annual General Meeting (“AGM”) 
of the Company and 11 August 2014. 
Further, the directors were given authority 
effective for the same period to allot 
relevant securities in the Company up to 
a maximum of approximately two-thirds 
of the total ordinary share capital in issue 
on 10 April 2013 in connection with an 
offer by way of a fully pre-emptive rights 
issue. A total of 9,495,195 shares (2.6% of 
issued ordinary share capital at the time 

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
Disclosure of information to 
auditor 
Each of the persons who is a director at 
the date of approval of this Annual Report 
confirms that:

•	 so far as the director is aware, there is 
no relevant audit information of which 
the Company’s auditor is unaware; 
and

•	

the director has taken all steps that he/
she ought to have taken as a director 
in order to make himself/herself aware 
of any relevant audit information 
and to establish that the Company’s 
auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should 
be interpreted in accordance with 
the provisions of Section 418 of the 
Companies Act 2006.

Appointment of auditor 
The Company’s Audit Committee is 
currently conducting a tender process 
for the 2014 audit. It is intended This 
process will be completed during March 
2014 and a resolution to re-appoint 
BDO LLP or appoint the Group’s new 
auditors, as recommended by the Audit 
Committee, together with a resolution 
to authorise the Directors to determine 
their remuneration will be proposed at 
the AGM. 

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Angela Leach 
Company Secretary
3 March 2014

Regulation
Top Technology Ventures Limited, a 
100%-owned subsidiary of the Company, 
is authorised and regulated by the 
Financial Conduct Authority under the 
Financial Services and Markets Act 2000.

Post balance sheet events
Material events occurring since the 
balance sheet date are disclosed in the 
strategic report. In summary, they are:

•	 The Group raised £100m (before 
expenses) of new equity capital in 
February 2014.

•	 On 23 January 2014, the Group 

announced the proposed 
recommended acquisition of the 
remaining 79.9% shareholding in 
Fusion IP plc not currently owned by 
the Group in an all-paper transaction 
to be implemented by way of a court-
sanctioned scheme of arrangement. 
At the date of signing of this Annual 
Report, the completion of the 
acquisition remains subject to, inter 
alia, court sanction and clearance by 
the OFT but it is currently anticipated 
that completion will occur in late 
March 2014.

•	 The intellectual property 

commercialisation agreement with the 
University of Manchester was extended 
in January 2014 to include proof-of-
principle funding for graphene projects 
and to commit a further £2.5 million 
of funding, bringing the total to £7.5 
million, under the revised terms of 
the agreement which has also been 
extended to 2019.

•	 There has been a net unrealised fair 

value increase in the Group’s holdings 
in quoted portfolio companies of 
£23.6m between 31 December 2013 
and 28 February 2014.

Articles of Association
The Company’s Articles may be 
amended by a special resolution of 
the shareholders. As at the date of this 
report the Company’s Articles include a 
qualifying third party indemnity provision 
(“QTPIP”) within the meaning of Section 
234 of the Companies Act 2006.

Substantial shareholders
As at 3 March 2014, the Company 
had been advised of the following 
shareholders with interests of 3% or more 
in its ordinary share capital. Other than 
as shown, so far as the Company (and 
its directors) are aware, no other person 
holds or is beneficially interested in a 
disclosable interest in the Company.

Shareholder

Invesco Limited

Lansdowne Partners 

Bailie Gifford & Co 

Sand Aire Limited 

Oppenheimer Funds Inc. 
(Massachusetts Mutual Life 
Insurance Company)

Legal & General Investment 
Management (LGIM) 

Ruffer LLP

%

29.2

14.8

12.7

6.4

5.0

4.6

3.5

Political donations 
The Group did not make any political 
donations in either year.

Corporate and social responsibility
Details on the Group’s policies, activities 
and aims with regard to its corporate and 
social responsibilities, including that of 
its greenhouse gas emissions is included 
in the Sustainability section on pages 50 
to 52.

Directors’ indemnity and liability 
insurance
During the year, the Company has 
maintained liability insurance in respect 
of its directors. Subject to the provisions 
of the Companies Act 2006, the Articles 
provide that to the extent that the 
proceeds of any liability insurance are 
insufficient to meet any liability in full, 
every director is entitled to be indemnified 
out of the funds of the Company against 
any liabilities incurred in the execution or 
discharge of his or her powers or duties. 

y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S

r
e
h
t
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G
r
u
O

75

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Statement of Directors’ Responsibilities

The Annual Report and Accounts 
complies with the Disclosure and 
Transparency Rules (DTR) of the United 
Kingdom’s Financial Conduct Authority 
and the UK Corporate Governance Code 
in respect of the requirements to produce 
an annual financial report.

The Annual Report and Accounts is the 
responsibility of, and has been approved 
by, the Directors.

Each of the directors confirms to the best 
of their knowledge:

•	

•	

•	

•	

the Annual Report and Accounts, 
taken as a whole, is fair balanced 
and understandable and provides 
the information necessary for 
the assessment of the Group’s 
performance, business model and 
strategy;

the Group financial statements have 
been prepared in accordance with 
International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the 
European Union, the Companies 
Act 2006 and Article 4 of the IAS 
Regulation, while the Company 
accounts have been prepared in 
accordance with United Kingdom 
Generally Accepted Accounting 
Practice;

the financial statements give a true 
and fair view of the assets, liabilities, 
financial position and profit and loss of 
the Group; and

the Annual Report and Accounts 
includes a fair review of the 
development and performance of the 
business and the financial position of 
the Group and the parent company, 
together with a description or the 
principal risks and uncertainties that 
they face.

ON BEHALF OF THE BOARD

Dr Bruce Smith
Chairman
3 March 2014

The directors are responsible for preparing the 
Annual Report and Accounts in accordance with 
applicable law and regulations. Company law 
requires the directors to prepare financial statements 
for each financial year. Under that law the directors 
are required to prepare the Group financial 
statements in accordance with International 
Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the 
European Union (“IFRSs”).

 The directors have elected to prepare the parent company financial 
statements in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice (United Kingdom Accounting Standards and applicable 
law). Under company law the Directors must not approve the financial 
statements unless they are satisfied that they give a true and fair view of the 
state of affairs of the Group and Company and of the profit or loss for the 
Group for that period. 

In preparing the Group financial statements, the directors are required to:

•	 select suitable accounting policies and then apply them consistently;

•	 make judgements and accounting estimates that are reasonable and 

prudent;

•	 state whether they have been prepared in accordance with the standards 

specified above, subject to any material departures disclosed and 
explained in the financial statements; 

•	 prepare the financial statements on the going concern basis unless it is 
inappropriate to presume that the Group and Company will continue in 
business; and

•	 prepare a directors’ report and directors’ remuneration report which 

comply with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006.

The directors are responsible for keeping adequate accounting records that 
are sufficient to show and explain the Company’s transactions and disclose 
with reasonable accuracy at any time the financial position of the Company 
and enable them to ensure that the financial statements comply with the 
Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the Group financial statements, Article 4 
of the IAS Regulation. They are also responsible for safeguarding the assets of 
the Company and hence for taking reasonable steps for the prevention and 
detection of fraud and other irregularities. The directors, having prepared the 
financial statements, have permitted the auditor to take whatever steps and 
undertake whatever inspections it considers to be appropriate for the purpose 
of enabling it to give its audit opinion.

The directors are responsible for ensuring the Annual Report and the 
financial statements are made available on a website. Financial statements 
are published on the Company’s website in accordance with legislation in 
the United Kingdom governing the preparation and dissemination of financial 
statements, which may vary from legislation in other jurisdictions. The 
maintenance and integrity of the Company’s website, including that of the 
financial statements contained therein, is the responsibility of the directors.

y
r
o
t
u
t
a
t
S

r
e
h
t
O

e
c
n
a
n
r
e
v
o
G

r
u
O

76

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report

We have audited the financial statements of IP Group plc for the year ended 31 December 2013 which comprise the consolidated 
statement of comprehensive income, the consolidated statement of financial position, the consolidated statement of cash flows, the 
consolidated statement of changes in equity, the Company balance sheet and the related notes. The financial reporting framework 
that has been applied in the preparation of the Group financial statements is applicable law and International Financial Reporting 
Standards (IFRSs) as adopted by the European Union. The financial reporting framework that has been applied in preparation of 
the parent company financial statements is applicable law and United Kingdom Accounting Standards (United Kingdom Generally 
Accepted Accounting Practice).

Opinion on financial statements
In our opinion:

•	

•	

•	

•	

the financial statements give a true and fair view of the state of the Group’s and the Company’s affairs as at 31 December 2013 and 
of the Group’s profit for the year then ended;

the Group financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union; 

the parent company financial statements have been properly prepared in accordance with United Kingdom Generally Accepted 
Accounting Practice; and 

the financial statements have been prepared in accordance with the requirements of the Companies Act 2006 and, as regards the 
Group financial statements, Article 4 of the IAS Regulation.

Our assessment of risks of material misstatement and an overview of the scope of our audit
We identified the following risks that we believe have had the greatest impact on our audit strategy and scope:

•	 Valuation of unlisted equity investments – The Group has £148m of investments where no quoted market price is available. These 

have been valued by management in accordance with International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines using a 
number of valuation techniques such as price of recent investment and earnings multiples. There is a risk that the carrying value of 
the portfolio does not fairly reflect its fair value as at balance sheet date. 

 — We have documented and assessed the design and implementation of the investment valuation processes and controls in 

place.

 — Where a recent transaction was used to value an investment we obtained an understanding of the circumstances around the 

transaction and whether they were considered to be at an arm’s length. We also agreed the price of recent investment to share 
purchase documentation.

 — We have challenged management and the investment managers on key judgements and assumptions affecting investment 

carrying values and adjustments made to the last price of recent investment in the context of the requirements of the 
International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines. In particular we focussed on the appropriateness of the 
valuation basis selected as well as the underlying assumptions such as milestone analysis and/or industry and sector analysis. 
We compared key underlying financial inputs to external sources and management information as applicable.

 — We considered events subsequent to the year end and up to the date of this report.

•	 Accounting treatment and valuation of the Oxford equity rights contract - Included in the balance sheet of the Group is the 

right to future shares in spin-out companies and licensing income from the University of Oxford chemistry department (‘Equity 
Rights’). During the year, a change in the fair value of the Equity Rights amounting to £5m was recognised. Management exercises 
significant judgement in determining the underlying assumptions used in the valuation model; the assumptions include the 
discount rate, number of spin-out companies and others. We therefore believe that there is a risk in the calculation of the value of 
the Equity Rights. 

 — We have checked the arithmetic accuracy of the discounted cash flow model and audited the inputs and assumptions into 

the model which are supported by a combination of historical data and management’s assessment of future events. We have 
obtained evidence to support and corroborate assumptions based on historical information and external industry data. For 
assumptions based on future events we have compared prior year assumptions against actual outcomes to understand the 
reasons for significant variances and considered whether they are indicative of bias or error in management’s approach to 
making assumptions.

 — We have challenged management on key judgements and assumptions and corroborated these where possible. We involved 
our valuations specialists to assess the appropriateness of the model and underlying assumptions. We have also reviewed 
management’s sensitivity analysis and in particular to changes in the discount rate and number of spin out companies and 
considered this in the context of the fair value range determined by management for this contract. 

t
r
o
p
e
R
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
A

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

77

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Independent auditor’s report
continued

•	 Tax: Substantial Shareholdings Exemption (SSE) - SSE is an exemption from corporate tax on gains on the disposal of investments in 
which a trading group or company holds more than 10% of the share capital of a trading company, for more than 12 months in the 
2 year period prior to the date of disposal. The Group does not provide for deferred tax liabilities in respect of portfolio valuation 
movements on the basis that the Group qualifies as a trading group under the SSE legislation. There is an ongoing risk that should 
IP Group’s activities become substantially non-trading in nature or the legislation changes a deferred tax liability would be required 
to be provided.

 — We have engaged tax specialists to review the Group’s activities, including the roles and responsibilities of the Group’s 

employees in order to assess whether the Group meets the statutory test for not having substantially non-trading activities and 
tested the various relative financial measures included within the HMRC manuals to the Group’s financial statements, as well as 
reviewing HMRC clearances obtained in prior years.

 — We have reviewed any relevent HMRC correspondence on SSE matters during the year and up to the date of this report.

The Audit Committee’s consideration of these risks is set out on page 72.

Purpose of this report
This report is made solely to the Company’s members, as a body, in accordance with Chapter 3 of Part 16 of the Companies Act 
2006. Our audit work has been undertaken so that we might state to the Company’s members those matters we are required to 
state to them in an auditor’s report and for no other purpose. To the fullest extent permitted by law, we do not accept or assume 
responsibility to anyone other than the Company and the Company’s members as a body, for our audit work, for this report, or for the 
opinions we have formed.

Respective responsibilities of directors and auditor
As explained more fully in the statement of directors’ responsibilities, the directors are responsible for the preparation of the financial 
statements and for being satisfied that they give a true and fair view. Our responsibility is to audit and express an opinion on the 
financial statements in accordance with applicable law and International Standards on Auditing (UK and Ireland). Those standards 
require us to comply with the Financial Reporting Council’s (FRC’s) Ethical Standards for Auditors.

Scope of the audit of the financial statements
A description of the scope of an audit of financial statements is provided on the FRC’s website at www.frc.org.uk/auditscopeukprivate.

Our application of materiality 
We apply the concept of materiality both in planning and performing our audit, and in evaluating the effect of misstatements on our 
audit and on the financial statements. We define planning materiality as the magnitude by which misstatements, including omissions, 
could influence the economic decisions of reasonable users that are taken on the basis of the financial statements. We also determine 
a level of performance materiality which we use to determine the extent of testing needed to reduce to an appropriately low level 
the probability that the aggregate of uncorrected and undetected misstatements exceeds materiality for the financial statements as a 
whole. 

We determined planning materiality for the financial statements as a whole to be £3,400,000. In determining this, we based our 
assessment on a level of 1% of total assets which reflects the underlying precision within the valuation of the investment portfolio 
and the range of reasonable possible alternative valuations that could be expected to apply to the unquoted investments. On the 
basis of our risk assessment, together with our assessment of the Company’s control environment, our judgment is that performance 
materiality for the financial statements should be 65% of materiality i.e. £2,200,000. Our objective in adopting this approach is to 
ensure that total detected and undetected audit differences do not exceed our materiality of £3,400,000 for the financial statements 
as a whole. 

We agreed with the Audit Committee that we would report to the Committee all audit differences in excess of £34,000, as well as 
differences below that threshold that, in our view, warranted reporting on qualitative grounds. 

Opinion on other matters prescribed by the Companies Act 2006
In our opinion:

the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited has been properly prepared in accordance with the Companies Act 
2006; and

the information given in the strategic report and the directors’ report for the financial year for which the financial statements are 
prepared is consistent with the financial statements. 

•	

•	

t
r
o
p
e
R
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
A

i

s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

78

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
Matters on which we are required to report by exception
Under the ISAs (UK and Ireland), we are required to report to you if, in our opinion, information in the annual report is:

•	 materially inconsistent with the information in the audited financial statements; or 

•	 apparently materially incorrect based on, or materially inconsistent with, our knowledge of the Company acquired in the course of 

performing our audit; or 

•	

is otherwise misleading.

In particular, we are required to consider whether we have identified any inconsistencies between our knowledge acquired during the 
audit and the directors’ statement that they consider the annual report is fair, balanced and understandable and whether the annual 
report appropriately discloses those matters that we communicated to the Audit Committee which we consider should have been 
disclosed. 

Under the Companies Act 2006 we are required to report to you if, in our opinion: 

•	 adequate accounting records have not been kept, or returns adequate for our audit have not been received from branches not 

visited by us; or

•	

the financial statements and the part of the directors’ remuneration report to be audited are not in agreement with the accounting 
records and returns; or

•	 certain disclosures of directors’ remuneration specified by law are not made; or 

•	 we have not received all the information and explanations we require for our audit. 

Under the Listing Rules we are required to review:

•	

•	

the directors’ statement, set out on page 49, in relation to going concern; and

the part of the corporate governance statement relating to the Company’s compliance with the nine provisions of the UK 
Corporate Governance Code specified for our review.

t
r
o
p
e
R
s
’
r
o
t
i
d
u
A

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

We have nothing to report in respect of these matters.

Neil Fung-On (senior statutory auditor)  
For and on behalf of BDO LLP, statutory auditor  
55 Baker Street, London 
United Kingdom  
3 March 2014 

BDO LLP is a limited liability partnership registered in England and Wales (with registered number OC305127).

79

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Consolidated statement of comprehensive income
For the year ended 31 December 2013

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments

(Loss)/profit on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Revenue from services and other income

Administrative expenses

Research and development costs

Share-based payment charge

Change in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset

Other administrative expenses

Operating profit

Finance income — interest receivable

Profit before taxation

Taxation

Profit and total comprehensive income for the year 

Attributable to:

Equity holders of the parent

Non-controlling interest

Earnings per share

Basic (p)

Diluted (p)

Note

15

4

22

7

9

2013
£m

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

2.4

85.4

(0.4)

(0.9)

(5.0)

(6.9)

(13.2)

72.2

0.4

72.6

—

72.6

73.0

(0.4)

72.6

10

10

19.60

19.27

2012
£m

38.0

11.8

0.4

2.3

52.5

(0.3)

(0.8)

(6.0)

(5.6)

(12.7)

39.8

0.9

40.7

—

40.7

40.7

—

40.7

11.13

10.71

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G

i

s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

80

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of financial position
As at 31 December 2013

ASSETS

Non-current assets

Goodwill

Property, plant and equipment

Oxford Equity Rights asset and related contract costs

Portfolio:

  Equity investments

  Debt investments

Limited and limited liability partnership interests

Other financial asset

Contingent value rights

Total non-current assets

Current assets

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total current assets

Total assets

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Equity attributable to owners of the parent

Share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Retained earnings

Total equity attributable to equity holders

Non-controlling interest

Total equity

Current liabilities

Trade and other payables

Non-current liabilities

Loans from limited partners of consolidated funds

Total equity and liabilities

Registered number: 4204490

Note

2013
£m

2012
£m

11

12

14

15

15

23

17

18

16

20

18.4 

0.2 

3.1 

18.4 

0.3 

8.1 

283.1 

177.9 

2.8 

4.8 

0.7 

1.4

3.9 

4.0 

0.7 

1.4

314.5

214.7

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

24.9 

0.9 

32.5 

15.4 

48.8 

339.4 

263.5 

7.5 

150.4 

12.8 

166.3 

337.0 

(0.4)

336.6

7.3 

150.4 

12.8 

92.6 

263.1 

—

263.1

19

1.5 

0.4 

1.3

339.4 

—

263.5 

The financial statements on pages 80 to 107 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 3 March 2014 and 
were signed on its behalf by:

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

81

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of cash flows
For the year ended 31 December 2013

Operating activities

Profit before taxation

Adjusted for:

Finance income — interest receivable

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Depreciation of property, plant and equipment

Loss/(profit) on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of Oxford equity rights asset

Share-based payment charge

Other portfolio income classified as investing activities cash flows

Changes in working capital

Decrease in trade and other receivables

Increase/(decrease) in trade and other payables 

Increase in non-current liabilities

Net cash flow from deposits

Other operating cash flows

Interest received

Net cash inflow from operating activities

Investing activities

Purchase of property, plant and equipment

Purchase of equity and debt investments

Investment in limited and limited liability partnerships

Proceeds from sale of equity investments

Distributions from limited and limited liability partnerships

Other portfolio income received

Net cash outflow from investing activities

Financing activities

Proceeds from the issue of share capital

Net cash inflow from financing activities

Net increase in cash and cash equivalents

Cash and cash equivalents at the beginning of the year

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G

2013
£m

2012
£m

72.6

40.7

(0.4)

(82.4)

(0.8)

0.1

0.2

5.0

0.9

(0.3)

0.1

1.1

1.3

27.5 

0.7

25.6

—

(27.5)

(0.2)

5.5 

0.2

0.1

(0.9)

(38.0)

(0.4)

0.1

(11.8)

6.0

0.8

—

0.1

(0.3)

—

17.5 

1.1

14.9

(0.1)

(26.3)

(0.4)

16.7 

0.1

—

(21.9)

(10.0)

—

— 

3.7 

15.4 

19.1 

—

— 

4.9 

10.5 

15.4 

i

s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

82

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
 
Consolidated statement of changes in equity
For the year ended 31 December 2013

Attributable to equity holders of the parent

At 1 January 2012

Profit and total 
comprehensive income 
for the year

Share-based payment 
charge

At 1 January 2013

Profit and total 
comprehensive income 
for the year

Equity issued to settle 
share-based payments

Share-based payment 
charge

At 31 December 2013

—

—

7.3

—

0.2

—

7.5

Share 
capital
£m

7.3

Share 
premium(i)
£m

150.4

Merger 
reserve(ii) 
£m

12.8

—

—

—

—

150.4

12.8

—

—

—

—

—

—

Retained 
earnings(iii)

£m

51.1

40.7

0.8

92.6

73.0

(0.2)

0.9

Total
£m

221.6

40.7

0.8

263.1

Non-controlling

interest(iv)

£m

—

—

—

—

Total 
equity
£m

221.6

40.7

0.8

263.1

73.0

(0.4)

72.6

—

0.9

—

—

—

0.9

150.4

12.8

166.3

337.0

(0.4)

336.6

(i) 

Share premium — Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value, net of directly attributable issue costs.

(ii)  Merger reserve — Amount subscribed for share capital in excess of nominal value in relation to the qualifying acquisition of subsidiary undertakings.

(iii)  Retained earnings — Cumulative net gains and losses recognised in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income net of associated share-based payments credits.

(iv)  Non-controlling interest — Share of losses attributable to the Limited Partners of IP Venture Fund II L.P. – a consolidated fund which was created in May 2013.

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
r
a
m

i
r
P
p
u
o
r
G

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

83

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
 
Notes to the consolidated financial statements 

1. Accounting Policies
Basis of preparation
The Annual Report and Accounts of IP Group plc (“IP Group” or the “Company”) and its subsidiary companies (together, the “Group”) 
are for the year ended 31 December 2013. The principal accounting policies adopted in the preparation of the financial statements 
are set out below. The policies have been consistently applied to all the years presented, unless otherwise stated. These financial 
statements have been prepared in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards, International Accounting Standards 
and Interpretations (collectively “IFRS”) issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (“IASB”) as adopted by the European 
Union (“adopted IFRSs”). 

The preparation of financial statements in compliance with IFRS requires the use of certain critical accounting estimates. It also 
requires Group management to exercise judgement in the most appropriate application in applying the Group’s accounting policies. 
The areas where significant judgements and estimates have been made in preparing the financial statements and their effect are 
disclosed in note 3.

Changes in accounting policies
(i) New standards, interpretations and amendments effective from 1 January 2013
IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements: which became effective for periods beginning on or after 1 January 2013, establishes 
principles for the preparation and presentation of consolidated financial statements when a reporting entity controls one or more 
other entities. The new standard replaces the consolidation requirements in SIC-12 Consolidation — Special Purpose Entities and 
IAS 27 Consolidated and Separate Financial Statements. While IFRS 10 specifies new criteria for the assessment of control, it has not 
resulted in any conclusions differing to those reached under the previously applicable standards.

IFRS 12 Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities: IFRS 12 sets out the disclosure requirements relating to an entity’s interests in 
subsidiaries, joint arrangements, associates and structured entities. The standard requires a reporting entity to disclose information 
that helps users to assess the nature and financial effects of the reporting entity’s relationship with other entities. As the new standard 
affects only disclosure, there is no effect on the Group’s financial position or performance.

IFRS 13 Fair Value Measurement: IFRS 13 sets out the framework for determining the measurement of fair value and the disclosure 
of information relating to fair value measurement, when fair value measurements and/or disclosures are required or permitted by 
other IFRSs. As a result, the guidance and requirements relating to fair value measurement that were previously located in other 
IFRSs have now been relocated to IFRS 13. While there has been some rewording of the previous guidance, there are few changes 
to the previous fair value measurement requirements. Instead, IFRS 13 is intended to clarify the measurement objective, harmonise 
the disclosure requirements, and improve consistency in application of fair value measurement. IFRS 13 did not materially affect any 
fair value measurements of the Group’s assets or liabilities, with changes being limited to presentation and disclosure, and therefore 
has no effect on the Group’s financial position or performance. In addition, IFRS 13 is to be applied prospectively and therefore 
comparative disclosures have not been presented. See note 3 Significant accounting estimates and judgements for more details and 
further references related to fair value measurement.

No other new standards, interpretations and amendments effective for the first time from 1 January 2013 have had a material effect 
on the Group’s financial statements.

(ii) New standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective
The following new standards, which have not been applied in these financial statements, will or may have an effect on the Group’s 
future financial statements:

IFRS 9 Financial Instruments: IFRS 9 will eventually replace IAS 39 in its entirety. The process has been divided into three main 
components, being classification and measurement; impairment; and hedge accounting. The Group provisionally assesses the 
potential effect to be immaterial given the majority of its financial assets are currently held at fair value through profit or loss. The 
previous effective date of 1 January 2015 has been withdrawn and is now expected to be implemented in 2018.

Amendment to IFRS 10 — Investment Entities: The amendments define an investment entity and require a parent that is an 
investment entity to measure its investments in particular subsidiaries at fair value through profit or loss, rather than consolidating 
them in its consolidated financial statements. Measurement at fair value through profit or loss must also be applied to an investment 
entity’s separate financial statements. The amendments also introduce disclosure requirements for investment entities into IFRS 12 
Disclosure of Interests in Other Entities and amend IAS 27 Separate Financial Statements. The Group, after a provisional examination 
expects to not qualify for the investment entity exemption and consequently, considers that the amendment is unlikely to result in 
changes to the preparation and presentation of the Group’s subsidiaries, associates or Limited Partnerships. The mandatory adoption 
starts for periods beginning on or after 1 July 2014 following EU endorsement in November 2013.

None of the other new standards, interpretations and amendments not yet effective is expected to have a material effect on the 
Group’s future financial statements.

84

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Financials Group NotesBasis of consolidation
(i) Subsidiaries
Where the Group has control over an entity, it is classified as a subsidiary. As per IFRS 10 an entity is classed as under the control of 
the Group when all three of the following elements are present: power over the entity, exposure to variable returns from the entity 
and the ability of the Group to use its power to affect those variable returns. Control is reassessed whenever facts and circumstances 
indicate that there may be a change in any of these elements of control. 

In situations where the Company has the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee without holding the majority 
of the voting rights, it considered that de facto control exists. In determining whether de facto control exists the Group considers all 
relevant facts and circumstances, including:

 — The size of the Company’s voting rights relative to both the size and dispersion of other parties who hold voting rights;

 — Substantive potential voting rights held by the company and by other parties;

 — Other contractual arrangements; and 

 — Historic patterns in voting attendance.

The consolidated financial statements present the results of the Company and its subsidiaries as if they formed a single entity. 
Intercompany transactions and balances between Group companies are therefore eliminated in full. The consolidated financial 
statements incorporate the results of business combinations using the acquisition method. In the statement of financial position, the 
acquiree’s identifiable assets, liabilities and contingent liabilities are initially recognised at their fair values at the acquisition date. The 
results of acquired operations are included in the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the date on which control 
is obtained. They are consolidated until the date on which control ceases.

(ii) Associates
Associates are entities over which the Group has significant influence, but does not control, generally accompanied by a shareholding 
of between 20% and 50% of the voting rights.

No associates are presented on the statement of financial position as the Group elects to hold such investments at fair value in the 
statement of financial position. This treatment is permitted by IAS 28 Investment in Associates and Joint Ventures, which permits 
investments held by entities that are akin to venture capital organisations to be excluded from its scope where those investments 
are designated, upon initial recognition, as at fair value through profit or loss and accounted for in accordance with IAS 39 Financial 
Instruments: Recognition and Measurement. Changes in fair value of associates are recognised in profit or loss in the period of the 
change. The Group has no interests in associates through which it carries on its business.

(iii) Limited partnerships and limited liability partnerships (“Limited Partnerships”)
Limited partnerships
Group entities act as general partner and investment manager to the following limited partnerships:

Name

IP Venture Fund II L.P. (“IPVFII”)

IP Venture Fund (“IPVF”)

Top Technology Ventures IV LP (“TTV IV”)

The North East Technology Fund L.P. (“NETF”)

Interest in limited 
partnership
%

33.3

10.0

1.0

—

The Group receives compensation for its role as investment manager to these limited partnerships including fixed fees and 
performance fees. The directors consider that these amounts are in substance and form “normal market rate” compensation for its 
role as investment manager. 

In order to determine whether these limited partnerships were required to be consolidated, the presence of the three elements of 
control noted in part (i) was examined. 

The Group’s significant stake in IPVFII creates a significant exposure to the variability of returns from those interests and the Group’s 
ability to direct the operations of the fund would result in IP Group obtaining the benefits of its activities. As such IPVFII meets the 
criteria in IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements and is consequently consolidated.

85

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued

1. Accounting Policies continued
In the case of IPVF and TTV IV, the directors consider that the minority limited partnership interests do not create an exposure of 
such significance that it indicates that the Group acts as anything other than agent for the other limited partners in the arrangement. 
Similarly, the lack of a stake in NETF indicates the Group’s role as an agent for the limited partner. As a result, the directors consider 
that the Group does not have the power to govern the operations of theses limited partnerships so as to obtain benefits from their 
activities and accordingly do not meet the definition of a subsidiary under IFRS 10 Consolidated Financial Statements. However the 
Group does have the power to exercise significant influence over its limited partnerships and accordingly the Group’s accounting 
treatment for the interests in IPVF and TTV IV is consistent with that of associates as described earlier in this report, i.e. in accordance 
with IAS 39 Financial Instruments: Recognition and Measurement and designated as at fair value through profit or loss on initial 
recognition. 

Limited liability partnerships
The Group has a 16.7% interest in the total capital commitments of Technikos LLP (“Technikos”). The general partner and investment 
manager of Technikos are parties external to the Group. 

(iv) Non-controlling interests
The total comprehensive income, assets and liabilities of non-wholly owned subsidiaries are attributed to owners of the parent and to 
the non-controlling interests in proportion to their relative ownership interests.

Portfolio return and revenue 
Change in fair value
Change in fair value of equity and debt investments represents revaluation gains and losses on the Group’s portfolio of investments. 
Gains on disposal of equity investments represent the difference between the fair value of consideration received and the carrying 
value at the start of the accounting period on the disposal of equity investments. Change in fair value of limited partnership 
investments represents revaluation gains and losses on the Group’s investments in limited partnership funds. Changes in fair values of 
assets do not constitute revenue. 

Revenue from services and other income
All revenue from services is generated within the United Kingdom and is stated exclusive of value added tax. Revenue from services 
and other income comprises:

Advisory fees: Fees earned from the provision of business support services are recognised as the related services are provided. 
Corporate finance advisory fees are generally earned as a fixed percentage of total funds raised and recognised at the time the related 
transaction is successfully concluded.

Fund management services: Fiduciary fund management fees are generally earned as a fixed percentage of total funds under 
management and are recognised as the related services are provided.

Dividends: Dividends receivable from equity shares are included within other portfolio income and recognised on the exdividend date 
or, where no ex-dividend date is quoted, are recognised when the Group’s right to receive payment is established.

Property, plant and equipment
All property, plant and equipment is shown at cost less subsequent depreciation and impairment. Cost includes expenditure that is 
attributable to the acquisition of the items. Depreciation on assets is calculated using the straight-line method to allocate the cost of 
each asset to its residual value over its estimated useful life, as follows:

Fixtures and fittings

Over 3 to 5 years

Computer equipment

Over 3 to 5 years

The assets’ residual values and useful lives are reviewed, and adjusted if appropriate, at each reporting date.

Intangible assets
Goodwill
Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition over the fair value of the net identifiable assets of the acquired subsidiary 
at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on acquisitions of subsidiaries is included in intangible assets and allocated from the acquisition 
date to each of the Group’s cash-generating units (“CGUs”) that are expected to benefit from the business combination. Goodwill may 
be allocated to CGUs in both the acquired business and in the existing business.

Impairment of intangible assets (including goodwill)
Goodwill is not subject to amortisation but is tested for impairment annually and whenever events or circumstances indicate that the 
carrying amount may not be recoverable. Assets that are subject to amortisation are tested for impairment when events or a change 
in circumstances indicate that the carrying amount may not be recoverable. An impairment loss is recognised for the amount by 
which the carrying amount exceeds its recoverable amount. The recoverable amount is the higher of the asset’s fair value less costs 
to sell and the value in use. For the purposes of assessing impairments, assets are grouped at the lowest levels for which there are 
identifiable cash flows (i.e. CGUs).

86

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Financials Group NotesFinancial assets
In respect of regular way purchases or sales, the Group uses trade date accounting to recognise or derecognise financial assets.

Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows from the assets have expired or the Group has transferred 
substantially all risks and rewards of ownership.

The Group classifies its financial assets into one of the categories listed below, depending on the purpose for which the asset was 
acquired. None of the Group’s financial assets are categorised as held to maturity or available for sale. 

(i) At fair value through profit or loss
Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are either financial assets held for trading or financial assets which are designated at 
fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition. 

This category includes equity investments, debt investments, equity rights, contingent value rights and investments in limited 
partnerships. Investments in associated undertakings which are held by the Group with a view to the ultimate realisation of capital 
gains are also categorised as at fair value through profit or loss. This measurement basis is consistent with the fact that the Group’s 
performance in respect of investments in equity investments, limited partnerships and associated undertakings is evaluated on a fair 
value basis in accordance with an established investment strategy. 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss are initially recognised at fair value and any gains or losses arising from subsequent 
changes in fair value are presented in profit or loss in the statement of comprehensive income in the period which they arise.

Fair value hierarchy
The Group classifies financial assets using a fair value hierarchy that reflects the significance of the inputs used in making the related 
fair value measurements. The level in the fair value hierarchy within which a financial asset is classified is determined on the basis of 
the lowest level input that is significant to that assets fair value measurement. The fair value hierarchy has the following levels:

Level 1 — Quoted prices in active markets.

Level 2 — Inputs other than quoted prices that are observable, such as prices from market transactions. These are mainly based on 
prices determined from recent investments in the last twelve months.

Level 3 — One or more inputs that are not based on observable market data.

Equity Investments
The fair values of quoted investments are based on bid prices in an active market at the reporting date. The fair value of unlisted 
securities is established using valuation techniques. These include the use of recent arm’s length transactions, discounted cash flow 
analysis and earnings multiples. Wherever possible the Group uses valuation techniques which make maximum use of market-based 
inputs. Accordingly, the valuation methodology used most commonly by the Group is the ‘price of recent investment’ contained in 
the International Private Equity and Venture Capital Valuation Guidelines (the “IPEVCV Guidelines”) endorsed by the British & European 
Venture Capital Associations. The following considerations are used when calculating the fair value of unlisted securities:

Cost
Where the investment being valued was itself made recently, its cost may provide a good indication of fair value unless there is 
objective evidence that the investment has since been impaired, such as observable data suggesting a deterioration of the financial, 
technical, or commercial performance of the underlying business.

Price of recent investment
The Group considers that fair value estimates that are based entirely on observable market data will be of greater reliability than those 
based on assumptions and, accordingly, where there has been any recent investment by third parties, the price of that investment will 
generally provide a basis of the valuation. The length of period for which it remains appropriate to use the price of recent investment 
depends on the specific circumstances of the investment and the stability of the external environment.

Given the nature of the Group’s investments in seed, start-up and early-stage companies where there are often no current and no 
short-term future earnings or positive cash flows it can be difficult to gauge the probability and financial impact of the success or 
failure of development or research activities and to make reliable cash flow forecasts. Consequently, the most appropriate approach 
to determine fair value is a methodology that is based on market data, that being the price of a recent investment. Where the Group 
considers that the price of recent investment, unadjusted, is no longer relevant and there are limited or no comparable companies or 
transactions from which to infer value, the Group carries out an enhanced assessment based on milestone analysis and/or industry 
and sector analysis. In applying the milestone analysis approach to investments in companies in early or development stages the 
Group seeks to determine whether there is an indication of change in fair value based on a consideration of performance against any 
milestones that were set at the time of the original investment decision, as well as taking into consideration the key market drivers of 
the investee company and the overall economic environment. 

87

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes1. Accounting Policies continued
Where the Group considers that there is an indication that the fair value has changed, an estimation is made of the required amount 
of any adjustment from the last price of recent investment. Wherever possible, this adjustment is based on objective data from the 
investee company and the experience and judgement of the Group; however, any adjustment is, by its very nature, subjective. Where 
a deterioration in value has occurred, the Group reduces the carrying value of the investment to reflect the estimated decrease. If 
there is evidence of value creation the Group may consider increasing the carrying value of the investment; however, in the absence 
of additional financing rounds or profit generation it can be difficult to determine the value that a purchaser may place on positive 
developments given the potential outcome and the costs and risks to achieving that outcome and accordingly caution is applied. 

Factors that the Group considers include, inter alia, technical measures such as product development phases and patent approvals, 
financial measures such as cash burn rate and profitability expectations, and market and sales measures such as testing phases, 
product launches and market introduction. 

Other valuation techniques
If there is no readily ascertainable value from following the ‘price of recent investment’ methodology, or there is objective evidence 
that a deterioration in fair value has occurred since a relevant transaction, the Group considers alternative methodologies in the 
IPEVCV Guidelines, such as discounted cash flows (”DCF”) or price-earnings multiples. DCF involves estimating the fair value of 
a business by calculating the present value of expected future cash flows, based on the most recent forecasts in respect of the 
underlying business. Given the difficulty of producing reliable cash flow forecasts for seed, start-up and early-stage companies as 
described earlier, this methodology is generally used as a confirmatory indicator of the level of any adjustment that may need to be 
made to the last price of recent investment. 

When using the earnings multiple methodology, earnings before interest and tax (“EBIT”) are generally used, adjusted to a maintainable 
level. A suitable earnings multiple is derived from an equivalent business or group of businesses, for which the average price-earnings 
multiple for the relevant sector index can generally be considered a suitable proxy. This multiple is applied to earnings to derive an 
enterprise value which is then discounted by up to 60% for non-marketability and other risks inherent to businesses in early stages  
of operation. 

No reliable estimate
Where a fair value cannot be estimated reliably the investment is reported at the carrying value at the previous reporting date unless 
there is objective evidence that the investment has since been impaired.

Equity rights
The equity rights asset represent consideration paid to the University of Oxford between December 2000 and June 2001 that gives 
the Group contractual rights to the receipt of shares in unlisted spin-out companies (or cash) based on research carried out in the 
university’s Department of Chemistry. It is considered to be a derivative financial asset and is designated as at fair value through profit 
and loss. Further details on the treatment of this asset are included in note 14.

Debt investments
Debt investments are generally unquoted debt instruments which are convertible to equity at a future point in time. Such instruments 
are considered to be hybrid instruments containing a fixed rate debt host contract with an embedded equity derivative. The Group 
designates the entire hybrid contract at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition and, accordingly, the embedded 
derivative is not separated from the host contract and accounted for separately. The fair value of debt investments is established by 
calculating the present value of expected future cash flows associated with the instrument.

Contingent value rights
In instances where the Group receives contingent financial consideration upon the disposal of a financial asset, the resulting asset 
shall be recognised and designated as at fair value through profit and loss, and treated accordingly.

(ii) Loans and receivables
These assets are non-derivative financial assets with fixed and determinable payments that are not quoted in an active market. They 
arise principally through the provision of services to customers (trade receivables) and are carried at cost less provision for impairment.

Deposits
Deposits comprise longer-term deposits held with financial institutions with an original maturity of greater than three months.

Cash and cash equivalents
Cash and cash equivalents include cash in hand and short-term deposits held with financial institutions with an original maturity of 
three months or less.

Financial liabilities
Financial liabilities are composed of trade payables and other short-term monetary liabilities, which are recognised at amortised cost.

Unless otherwise indicated, the carrying amounts of the Group’s financial liabilities are a reasonable approximation to their fair value.

88

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group NotesShare capital
Financial instruments issued by the Group are treated as equity if the holders have only a residual interest in the Group’s assets after 
deducting all liabilities. The objective of the Group is to manage capital so as to provide shareholders with above average returns 
through capital growth over the medium to long term. The Group considers its capital to comprise its share capital, share premium, 
merger reserve and retained earnings.

Top Technology Ventures Limited, a Group subsidiary, is subject to external capital requirements imposed by the Financial Conduct 
Authority (“FCA”) and as such must ensure that it has sufficient capital to satisfy these requirements. The Group ensures it remains 
compliant with these requirements as described in the financial statements of Top Technology Ventures Limited.

Employee benefits
(i) Pension obligations
The Group operates a company defined-contribution pension scheme for which all employees are eligible. The assets of the scheme are 
held separately from those of the Group in independently administered funds. The Group currently makes contributions on behalf of staff 
to this scheme or to employee personal pension schemes on an individual basis. The Group has no further payment obligations once 
the contributions have been paid. The contributions are recognised as employee benefit expenses when they are due.

(ii) Share-based payments
The Group engages in equity-settled share-based payment transactions in respect of services receivable from employees, by granting 
employees conditional awards of ordinary shares subject to certain vesting conditions. 

Conditional awards of shares are made pursuant to the Group’s Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards. The fair value of the shares 
is estimated at the date of grant, taking into account the terms and conditions of the award, including market-based performance 
conditions. 

The difference between the fair value of the employee services received in respect of the shares granted and the price payable is 
recognised as an expense over the appropriate performance and vesting period. The corresponding credit is recognised in retained 
earnings within total equity. The fair value of services is calculated using the market value on the date of award and is adjusted for 
expected and actual levels of vesting. Where conditional awards of shares lapse the expense recognised to date is credited to the 
statement of comprehensive income in the year in which they lapse.

Where the terms for an equity-settled award are modified, and the modification increases the total fair value of the share-based 
payment, or is otherwise beneficial to the employee at the date of modification, the incremental fair value is amortised over the 
vesting period.

Deferred tax
Full provision is made for deferred tax on all temporary differences resulting from the carrying value of an asset or liability and its tax 
base. Deferred tax is determined using tax rates (and laws) that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the reporting date and 
are expected to apply when the related deferred tax asset is realised or deferred tax liability settled. Deferred tax assets are recognised 
to the extent that it is probable that the deferred tax asset will be recovered in the future.

Leases
Leases where the lessor retains substantially all of the risks and rewards of ownership are classified as operating leases. Payments 
made under operating leases are charged to administrative expenses in the statement of comprehensive income on a straight-line 
basis over the term of the lease.

2. Financial Risk Management
As set out in the Principal risks and uncertainties section on pages 34 to 37, the Group is exposed, through its normal operations, to a 
number of financial risks, the most significant of which are market, liquidity and credit risks. 

In general, risk management is carried out throughout the Group under policies approved by the Board of Directors. The following 
further describes the Group’s objectives, policies and processes for managing those risks and the methods used to measure them. 
Further quantitative information in respect of these risks is presented throughout these financial statements.

(a) Market risk
(i) Price risk
The Group is exposed to equity securities price risk as a result of the equity and debt investments, and investments in limited 
partnerships held by the Group and categorised as at fair value through profit or loss.

The Group mitigates this risk by having established investment appraisal processes and asset monitoring procedures which are subject 
to overall review by the Board. The Group has also established corporate finance and communications teams dedicated to supporting 
portfolio companies with fundraising activities and investor relations.

89

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes2. Financial Risk Management continued
The Group holds investments which are publicly traded on AIM or ISDX and investments which are not traded on an active market.

The net increase in fair value of the Group’s equity and debt investments during 2013 of £82.4m represents a 45% change against 
the opening balance (2012: net increase of £38.0m, 31%) and a similar increase or decrease in the prices of quoted and unquoted 
investments is considered to be reasonably possible. The table below summarises the impact of a 1% increase/decrease in the price of 
both quoted and unquoted investments on the Group’s post-tax profit for the year and on equity.

Quoted
£m

2013
Unquoted
£m

Equity investments and investments in 
limited partnerships

1.4

1.5

Total
£m

2.9

Quoted
£m

2012
Unquoted
£m

0.8

1.0

Total
£m

1.8

(ii) Interest rate risk
As the Group has no significant borrowings it has only a limited interest rate risk. The primary impact to the Group is the impact on 
income and operating cash flow as a result of the interest-bearing deposits and cash and cash equivalents held by the Group.

The Group mitigates this risk, in co-ordination with liquidity risk, by managing its proportion of fixed to floating rate financial assets. 
The table below summarises the interest rate profile of the Group.

Financial assets

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Contingent value rights

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Other financial assets

Trade receivables

Other receivables

Financial liabilities

Trade payables

Other accruals and deferred income

Loans from limited partners of 
consolidated funds

2013

Fixed
rate 
£m

Floating 
rate
£m

Interest 
free
£m

Total
£m

Fixed rate
£m

2012

Floating 
rate
£m

Interest 
free
£m

—

—

0.6

—

5.0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

19.1

—

—

—

2.9

2.9

283.1

283.1

2.2

1.4

—

—

0.7

0.4

0.4

2.8

1.4

5.0

19.1

0.7

0.4

0.4

—

—

3.0

—

32.5

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15.4

—

—

—

7.9

177.9

0.9

1.4

—

—

0.7

0.4

0.5

Total
£m

7.9

177.9

3.9

1.4

32.5

15.4

0.7

0.4

0.5

5.6

19.1

291.1

315.8

35.5

15.4

189.7

240.6

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.1)

(1.4)

(1.3)

(2.8)

(0.1)

(1.4)

(1.3)

(2.8)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.1)

(0.3)

—

(0.4)

(0.1)

(0.3)

—

(0.4)

At 31 December 2013, if interest rates had been 1% higher/lower, post-tax profit for the year, and other components of equity, would 
have been £0.2m (2012: £0.2m) higher/lower as a result of higher interest received on floating rate cash deposits.

(b) Liquidity risk
The Group seeks to manage liquidity risk, to ensure sufficient liquidity is available to meet foreseeable needs and to invest cash assets 
safely and profitably. Accordingly, the Group only invests working capital in short-term instruments issued by reputable counterparties. 
The Group continually monitors rolling cash flow forecasts to ensure sufficient cash is available for anticipated cash requirements.

90

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes(c) Credit risk
The Group’s credit risk is primarily attributable to its deposits, cash and cash equivalents, debt investments and trade receivables. The 
Group seeks to mitigate its credit risk on cash and cash equivalents by making short-term deposits with counterparties, or by investing 
in treasury funds with an “AA” credit rating or above managed by institutions. Short-term deposit counterparties are required to have 
most recently reported total assets in excess of £3bn and, where applicable, a prime short-term credit rating at the time of investment 
(ratings are generally determined by Moody’s or Standard & Poor’s). Moody’s prime credit ratings of “P1”, “P2” and “P3” indicate 
respectively that the rating agency considers the counterparty to have a “superior”, “strong” or “acceptable” ability to repay short-term 
debt obligations (generally defined as having an original maturity not exceeding 13 months). An analysis of the Group’s deposits and 
cash and cash equivalents balance analysed by credit rating as at the reporting date is shown in the table below. All other financial 
assets are unrated. 

Credit rating

P1

P2

AA

Total deposits and cash and cash equivalents

2013
£m

14.2

9.9

–

24.1 

2012
£m

14.8

30.6

2.5

47.9 

The Group has no significant concentration of credit risk, with exposure spread over a large number of counterparties and customers. 
The Group has detailed policies and strategies which seek to minimise these associated risks, including defining maximum 
counterparty exposure limits for term deposits based on their perceived financial strength at the commencement of the deposit.  
The maximum single counterparty limit for deposits at 31 December 2013 was £10m (2012: £10m). 

The Group’s exposure to credit risk on debt investments is managed in a similar way to equity price risk, as described earlier, through 
the Group’s investment appraisal processes and asset monitoring procedures which are subject to overall review by the Board.

The maximum exposure to credit risk for debt investments, receivables and other financial assets is represented by their carrying 
amount.

3. Significant Accounting Estimates and Judgements
The directors make judgements and estimates concerning the future. Estimates and judgements are continually evaluated and are 
based on historical experience and other factors, such as expectations of future events, and are believed to be reasonable under the 
circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates. The estimates and assumptions that have the most significant effects 
on the carrying amounts of the assets and liabilities in the financial statements are discussed below.

(i) Valuation of unquoted equity investments
The judgements required in order to determine the appropriate valuation methodology of unquoted equity investments have a 
significant risk of causing a material adjustment to the carrying amounts of assets and liabilities. These judgements include making 
assessments of the future earnings potential of portfolio companies, appropriate earnings multiples to apply, and marketability and 
other risk discounts.

(ii) Impairment of goodwill
The Group is required to test, at least annually, whether goodwill has suffered any impairment. The recoverable amount is determined 
using a number of value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sell calculations. The use of these methods requires the estimation of 
future cash flows and the selection of a suitable discount rate in order to calculate the present value of these cash flows, as well as 
the selection of applicable and reasonable multiples..

(iii) Equity rights
On initial recognition, the equity rights arrangement was considered in substance to be a derivative financial asset. This conclusion 
was reached after considering that the asset’s value changes in response to a change in an ‘underlying’, being the number and value 
of spin-out companies created, the net investment was considered to be smaller than would be expected for other contracts with 
similar response to changes in market factors and it is to be settled at a future date. 

As the asset is not quoted on an active market the fair value is determined using valuation techniques, including discounted cash 
flows. The asset has historically been held at cost since no reliable estimate of fair value could be reached. At 31 December 2013 the 
information available to the directors and the time remaining in the contract produced a sufficiently accurate estimate of fair value at 
balance sheet date. In the discounted cash flow model the directors considered the historic asset performance, the spin-out pipeline 
and available economic data to estimate the unobservable inputs. Those inputs include the average spin-out rate and the projected 
cash flows on IPO or trade sale from anticipated spin-out opportunities. The discount rate used for valuing the equity rights asset is 
determined based on the Group’s cost of capital. 

Discussion of sensitivity analyses is included in the relevant note for each of the above estimates and judgements.

91

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes4. Revenue From Services
All revenue from services is derived from the provision of advisory and venture capital fund management services.

5. Operating Segments
For both the year ended 31 December 2013 and the year ended 31 December 2012 the Group’s revenue and profit/loss before 
taxation were derived almost entirely from its principal activities within the UK. Though the Group has initiated operations in the 
US the associated revenues and costs are currently immaterial and accordingly no additional geographical disclosures are given. 
For management reporting purposes, the Group is currently organised into three operating segments: (i) the commercialisation of 
intellectual property via the formation of long-term partner relationships with universities; (ii) management of venture funds focusing 
on early-stage UK technology companies; and (iii) the in-licensing of drugable intellectual property from research intensive institutions. 
These activities are described in further detail in the Strategic report on pages 01 to 37.

Year ended 31 December 2013

STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments 

Loss on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Revenue from advisory services and other portfolio income

Revenue from fund management services

Change in fair value of Oxford Equity Rights asset

Administrative expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance income – interest receivable

Profit/(loss) before taxation

Taxation

Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive income for the year

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Assets

Liabilities

Net assets

Other segment items

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

Amortisation of intangible assets

University 
partnership 
business
£m

Venture 
capital fund 
management
£m

In-licensing 
activity 
£m

Consolidated
£m

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

0.8

—

(5.0)

(6.9)

71.9

0.4

72.3

—

72.3

332.8

(1.3)

331.5

—

0.1

—

—

—

—

0.3

1.3

—

(0.8)

0.8

—

0.8

—

0.8

6.4

(1.4)

5.0

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.5)

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

0.2

(0.1)

0.1

—

—

—

82.4

(0.2)

0.8

1.1

1.3

(5.0)

(8.2)

72.2

0.4

72.6

—

72.6

339.4

(2.8)

336.6

—

0.1

—

92

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group NotesUniversity 
partnership 
business
£m

Venture 
capital fund 
management
£m

In-licensing 
activity 
£m

Consolidated
£m

Year ended 31 December 2012

STATEMENT OF COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

Portfolio return and revenue

Change in fair value of equity and debt investments

Profit on disposal of equity investments

Change in fair value of limited and limited liability partnership interests

Revenue from advisory services

Revenue from fund management services

Change in fair value of Oxford equity rights asset

Administrative expenses

Operating profit/(loss)

Finance income – interest receivable

Profit/(loss) before taxation

Taxation

Profit/(loss) and total comprehensive income for the year

STATEMENT OF FINANCIAL POSITION

Assets

Liabilities

Net assets

Other segment items

Capital expenditure

Depreciation

Amortisation of intangible assets

6. Auditor’s Remuneration
Details of the auditor’s remuneration are set out below:

38.0

11.8

0.4

0.5

—

(6.0)

(5.5)

39.2

0.9

40.1

—

40.1

257.9

(0.2)

257.7

0.1

0.1

—

—

—

—

0.4

1.4

—

(0.7)

1.1

—

1.1

—

1.1

5.6

(0.2)

5.4

—

—

—

Fees payable to the Company’s auditor for the audit of the Company’s annual accounts 

The audit of the Company’s subsidiaries, pursuant to legislation 

Total fees for audit services

Audit-related assurance services 

Total assurance services

Tax compliance services 

Taxation advisory services

Corporate finance services 

All other services 

Total non-assurance services

—

—

—

—

—

—

(0.5)

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

—

(0.5)

—

—

—

—

—

—

2013
£000

64

36

100

23

123

46

26

—

7

79

202

38.0

11.8

0.4

0.9

1.4

(6.0)

(6.7)

39.8

0.9

40.7

—

40.7

263.5

(0.4)

263.1

0.1

0.1

—

2012
£000

64

34

98

21

119

44

28

—

7

79

198

93

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes7. Profit/(loss) From Operations
Profit/(loss) from operations has been arrived at after charging:

Amortisation of intangible assets

Depreciation of tangible assets

Employee costs (see note 8)

Operating leases — property

(Loss)/profit on disposal of equity investments

8. Employee Costs
Employee costs (including directors) comprise:

Salaries

Defined contribution pension cost

Share-based payment charge (see note 22)

Social security

2013
£m

—

0.1 

5.1 

0.4 

(0.2)

2013
£m

3.7 

0.1 

0.9 

0.4

5.1

2012
£m

—

0.1 

4.0 

0.2 

11.8

2012
£m

2.7 

0.1 

0.8 

0.4

4.0

The average monthly number of persons (including executive directors) employed by the Group during the year was 35, all of whom 
were involved in management and administration activities (2012: 34). Details of directors’ remuneration can be found in the Directors’ 
Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 70.

9. Taxation

Current tax

Deferred tax

2013
£m

—

—

The amount for the year can be reconciled to the profit per the statement of comprehensive income as follows:

Profit before tax

Tax at the UK corporation tax rate of 23.5% (2012: 24.5%)

Non-taxable income

Movement in tax losses arising not recognised

Other adjustments

Tax credit

2013
£m

72.6

16.9

(19.9)

3.0

—

—

2012
£m

—

—

2012
£m

40.7

10.0

(7.2)

(2.8)

—

—

At 31 December 2013, deductible temporary differences and unused tax losses for which no deferred tax asset has been recognised 
totalled £53.0m (2012: £22.6m). An analysis is shown below:

Share-based payment costs

Unused tax losses

2013

2012

Amount
£m

Deferred tax
£m

Amount
£m

Deferred tax
£m

13.7

39.3

53.0

2.7

7.9

10.6

—

22.6

22.6

—

4.5

4.5

This asset has not been recognised in the financial statements due to current uncertainties surrounding the reversal of the underlying 
temporary differences. This deferred tax asset would be recovered if there were future taxable profits from which the reversal of the 
underlying temporary difference could be deducted.

The directors believe that the Group qualifies for Substantial Shareholder Exemption and therefore no deferred tax is provided for in 
respect of the net uplift in valuation of the Group’s equity investments.

94

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes10. Earnings Per Share

Earnings

Earnings for the purposes of basic and dilutive earnings per share

Number of shares

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for
the purposes of basic earnings per share

Effect of dilutive potential ordinary shares:
Long-Term Incentive Plan 

Weighted average number of ordinary shares for
the purposes of diluted earnings per share

2013
£m

73.0

2012
£m

40.7

2013
Number of 
shares

2012
Number of
 shares

372,513,387

365,763,664

6,515,903 

14,142,480 

379,029,290 

379,906,144 

The Group has only one class of potentially dilutive ordinary share. These are contingently issuable shares arising under the  
Group LTIP. 

11. Goodwill

At 1 January 2012

At 1 January 2013

At 31 December 2013

£m

18.4

18.4

18.4

The Group conducts annual impairment tests on the carrying value of goodwill, based on the recoverable amount of the CGUs to 
which the goodwill has been allocated. The goodwill allocated to each CGU is summarised in the table below. A number of both 
value-in-use and fair-value-less-costs-to-sale calculations are used to assess the recoverable values of the CGUs, details of which are 
specified below.

University partnership CGU

Fund management CGU

2013 
£m

16.3

2.1

18.4

2012 
£m

16.3

2.1

18.4

Impairment review of venture capital fund management CGU
The key assumptions of the DCF model used to assess the value in use, and the range of multiples applied in calculating the fair-
value-less-costs-to-sell based on a percentage of assets under management are shown below:

Discount rate

Number of funds under management

Management fee

Cost inflation

Percentage of assets under management

2013

2012

9%–11%

9%–11%

3

3

2%–3.5%

2%–3.5%

3%

2%–7%

4%

n/a

A number of different value-in-use models were assessed in order to evaluate the recoverable value of the CGU, none of which 
resulted in an impairment being required.

Impairment review of the university partnership CGU
The key assumptions of the DCF models used to assess the value in use are shown overleaf.

For the purposes of impairment testing, the university partnership CGU comprises those elements connected with the Group’s 
university partnership business other than those that specifically relate to the Group’s contract with the University of Oxford’s 
Department of Chemistry (see note 14). The directors consider that for each of the key variables which would be relevant in 
determining a recoverable value for the university partnership CGU, there is a range of reasonably possible alternative values. The key 
variable ranges are set out overleaf:

95

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes11. Goodwill continued

Number of spin-out companies per year 

Annual investment rate

Rate of return achieved

Initial equity stake acquired by the Group under the university partnership

Proportion of spin-out companies failing

Weighted average holding period (years)

Dilution rates prior to exit as a result of financing for spin-out companies 

Proportion of IPO exits

IPO exit valuations

Proportion of disposal exits

Disposal valuations

Discount rate

2013

7–10

£20m–£35m

18%–22%

2012

4–8

n/a

n/a

12%–30%

12%–30%

32%–45%

30%–45%

3–5

n/a

40%–60%

40%–60%

25%–35%

25%–35%

£35m–£45m £20m–£40m

28%–32%

25%–35%

£25m–£35m £10m–£30m

9%–11%

8%–12%

A number of different value-in-use models were assessed in order to evaluate the recoverable value of the CGU, none of which 
resulted in an impairment being required.

12. Property, Plant and Equipment

Cost

At 1 January 2013

Additions

At 31 December 2013

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 January 2013

Charge for the year

At 31 December 2013

Net book value

At 31 December 2013

At 31 December 2012

Cost

At 1 January 2012

Additions

At 31 December 2012

Accumulated depreciation

At 1 January 2012

Charge for the year

At 31 December 2012

Net book value

At 31 December 2012

At 31 December 2011

96

Total
£m

1.0

—

1.0

0.7

0.1

0.8

0.2

0.3

Total
£m

0.8

0.2

1.0

0.6

0.1

0.7

0.3

0.2

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes13. Categorisation of Financial Instruments

Financial assets

At 31 December 2013

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Other financial assets

Contingent value rights

Limited and limited liability partnership interests 

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total

At 31 December 2012

Equity rights

Equity investments

Debt investments

Other financial assets

Contingent value rights

Limited and limited liability partnership interests

Trade and other receivables

Deposits

Cash and cash equivalents

Total

At fair value through profit or loss

Held for trading
£m

Designated 
upon initial 
recognition
£m

Loans and 
receivables
£m

3.1 

—

—

0.7 

—

—

—

—

—

—

283.1 

2.8 

—

1.4

4.8

—

—

—

3.8 

292.1 

8.1 

—

—

0.7 

—

—

—

—

—

—

177.9 

3.9 

—

1.4

4.0

—

—

—

8.8 

187.2 

—

—

—

—

—

—

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

24.9 

—

—

—

—

—

—

0.9 

32.5 

15.4 

48.8 

Total
£m

3.1 

283.1 

2.8 

0.7 

1.4

4.8

0.8 

5.0 

19.1 

320.8 

8.1 

177.9 

3.9 

0.7 

1.4

4.0

0.9 

32.5 

15.4 

244.8 

All financial liabilities are categorised as other financial liabilities and recognised at amortised cost.

The Group does not consider that any change in fair value of financial assets in the year is attributable to credit risk (2012: £nil).

All net fair value gains in the year are attributable to financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition 
(2012: all net fair value gains attributable to financial assets designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition).

14. Equity Rights and Related Contract Costs

Cost

Equity rights
£m

Contract costs
£m

Total
£m

At 1 January 2013 and 31 December 2013

19.9

0.5

20.4

Aggregate amortisation and change in fair value of contract costs

At 1 January 2013

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2013

Net book value

At 31 December 2013

At 31 December 2012

(12.0)

(5.0)

(17.0)

2.9 

7.9 

(0.3)

—

(0.3)

0.2

0.2

(12.3)

(5.0)

(17.3)

3.1

8.1

97

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes14. Equity Rights and Related Contract Costs continued

Equity rights
£m

Contract
 costs
£m

Total
£m

Cost

At 1 January 2012 and 31 December 2012

19.9

0.5

20.4

Aggregate amortisation and change in fair value of contract costs

At 1 January 2012

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2012

Net book value

At 31 December 2012

At 31 December 2011

(6.0)

(6.0)

(12.0)

7.9 

13.9 

(0.3)

—

(0.3)

0.2

0.2

(6.3)

(6.0)

(12.3)

8.1

14.1

Carrying amount of equity rights
Equity rights represent consideration paid to the University of Oxford between December 2000 and June 2001. 

In return for the non-refundable, non-interest bearing, advance totalling £20.1m, the Group has the right to receive from the University 
the following over its 15-year term:

 — 50% of the university’s equity shares in any spin-out company created based on intellectual property created by academics that are 

considered to be part of the Department of Chemistry (i.e. equity instruments in unlisted companies); and 

 — 50% of the university’s share of any cash payments received by the university from parties who have licensed intellectual property 

created by academics that are considered to be part of the Department of Chemistry.

The contract expires on 23 November 2015.

The directors consider that for each of the key variables which would be relevant in determining a fair value for this financial 
instrument, there is a range of reasonably possible alternative values. The key variable ranges are set out below:

Number of spin-out companies per year from University of Oxford’s Department of Chemistry

Initial equity stake acquired by the Group under the equity rights contract

Proportion of spin-out companies failing

Dilution rates prior to exit as a result of financing for spin-out companies 

Proportion of IPO exits

IPO exit valuations

Proportion of disposal exits

Disposal valuations

Discount rate

2013

1–2

2012

1–2

20%–25%

20%–25%

30%–40%

30%–40%

35%–60%

35%–60%

30%–40%

30%–40%

£30m–£50m £30m–£50m

25%–35%

25%–35%

£30m–£40m £30m–£40m

9%–11%

9%–11%

These key variable ranges result in a wide range of fair value estimates for the equity rights agreement, from £2.3m to £4.4m using a 
range of reasonably possible variables, with the number of spin-outs being the variable giving rise to the widest variation in estimated 
fair values. In order to calculate a more accurate valuation figure given the multitude of reliable scenarios generated when altering the 
discounted cash flows variables, a probability weighting expected return method is utilised. Having applied probabilities to the various 
possible scenarios, the method returned an estimated asset value of £3.1m at 31 December 2013 (2012: £8.1m). 

98

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes15. Investment Portfolio

Group

At 1 January 2013

Investments during the year

Transaction-based reclassifications during the year

Other transfers between hierarchy levels during the year

Disposals

Change in fair value in the year

At 31 December 2013

At 1 January 2012

Investments during the year

Transaction-based reclassifications during the year

Other transfers between hierarchy levels during the year

Disposals

Change in fair value in the year

At 31 December 2012

Level 1

Level 2

Level 3

Equity 
investments in 
quoted spin-out 
companies
£m

Equity 
investments in 
unquoted spin-
out companies
£m

Unquoted debt 
investments 
in spin-out 
companies
£m

Equity 
investments in 
unquoted spin-
out companies
£m

84.6 

9.4 

— 

0.6

(5.6)

46.1 

135.1 

50.0 

8.5 

3.5 

—

(5.4)

28.0 

84.6 

86.5 

14.1 

3.6

(12.0)

(0.2)

39.0 

131.0 

47.9 

14.5 

(2.6)

(1.2)

—

27.9 

86.5 

3.9 

4.0 

(3.7)

(0.4)

—

(1.0)

2.8 

3.4 

2.6 

(1.2)

—

(0.1)

(0.8)

3.9 

6.8 

–

0.1 

11.8 

—

(1.7)

17.0 

22.5 

0.7 

0.3 

1.2 

(0.8)

(17.1)

6.8 

Total
£m

181.8 

27.5 

—

—

(5.8)

82.4 

285.9 

123.8 

26.3 

—

—

(6.3)

38.0 

181.8 

Fair values of unquoted spin-out companies classified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy have been determined in part or in full by 
valuation techniques that are not supported by observable market prices or rates. Investments in 25 companies have been classified 
as Level 3 and the individual valuations for each of these have been arrived at using a variety of valuation techniques and assumptions. 
For instances where the fair values are based upon the most recent market transaction but which occurred more than twelve 
months previously, the investments are reclassified as Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy. However, if the assumptions used in the 
valuation techniques for the Group’s holding in each company are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material 
difference to the carrying value of the respective spin-out company. The effect on the consolidated statement of comprehensive 
income for the period is also not expected to be material.

The net increase in fair value for the year of £82.4m (2012: £38.0m) includes a net decrease of £1.7m (2012: £9.9m increase) that has 
been estimated using a valuation technique. Further details are contained within the accounting policy for equity investments. During 
the period then has been a net transfer between the level 2 heirarchy to level 3 of circa £12m. This is due to a number of portfolio 
companies not receiving financing in the previous 12 months and subsequently being reclassified. However these companies had 
previously raised sufficient capital to allow extended periods of development and continue to make good progress against technical 
milestones.

Change in fair value in the year

Fair value gains

Fair value losses

The Company’s interests in subsidiary undertakings are listed in note 2 to the Company’s financial statements.

2013
£m

90.2

(7.8)

82.4

2012
£m

64.5

(26.5)

38.0

99

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes16. Trade and Other Receivables

Trade debtors

Prepayments

Other receivables

2013
£m

0.3

0.1

0.4

0.8

2012
£m

0.4

0.2

0.3

0.9

The directors consider the carrying amount of trade and other receivables to approximate their fair value. All receivables are interest 
free, repayable on demand and unsecured. 

17. Other Financial Asset
Other financial asset comprises a zero-cost forward contract giving the Group the right to receive sale proceeds when University 
of Leeds sells down its stake in specified spin-out companies subject to a maximum receivable of £0.7m following £nil receipt of 
sale proceeds during 2013 (2012: £0.7m receivable). The asset has no set date of repayment or other rights of recourse. This asset 
is classified as a financial asset held for trading initially measured at fair value with subsequent changes recognised in the statement 
of comprehensive income. Fair value is determined by discounting expected cash flows at prevailing market rates of interest and 
accordingly, the Group considers this asset to be Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy throughout the current and previous financial 
years. If the assumptions used in the valuation techniques are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material 
difference to the statement of financial position, nor the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

18. Contingent Value Rights
As a result of the disposal of Proximagen Group plc in August 2012, the Group received contingent consideration, in the form of 
contingent value rights (“CVRs”), based upon future net revenues of two associated drug programmes. In line with the Group’s 
policies, these have been recognised as financial assets at fair value through profit and loss, and has been fair valued at £1.4m (2012: 
£1.4m). The Group considers this asset to be Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy throughout the current and previous financial years. If 
the assumptions used in the valuation techniques are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material difference to 
the statement of financial position, nor the consolidated statement of comprehensive income.

19. Trade and Other Payables

Current liabilities

Trade payables

Social security expenses 

Other accruals and deferred income 

Non-current liabilities

Loans drawn down from the Limited Partners of consolidated funds

2013
£m

0.1

0.1

1.3

1.5

2013
£m

1.3

1.3

20. Share Capital

Issued and fully paid:

Ordinary Shares of 2p each

At 1 January

Issued under employee share plans

At 31 December

2013

2012

Number

£m

Number

365,763,664

9,495,195

375,258,859

7.3

0.2

7.5

365,763,664

—

365,763,664

2012
£m

0.1

0.1

0.2

0.4

2012
£m

—

—

£m

7.3

—

7.3

In April 2013 the Group issued 9,495,195 new ordinary shares with a par value of 2p in order to settle the 2010 LTIP scheme which 
partially achieved its vesting conditions and consequently became payable to the Group’s employees. The Company has one class of 
ordinary shares which carry equal voting rights, equal rights to income and distributions of assets on liquidation or otherwise, and no 
right to fixed income. 

100

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes21. Operating Lease Arrangements

Payments under operating leases recognised in the statement of comprehensive income for the year

2013
£m

0.4

2012
£m

0.4

At the reporting date, the Group had outstanding commitments for future minimum lease payments under non-cancellable operating 
leases, which fall due as follows:

Within one year

In the second to fifth years inclusive

2013
£m

0.3

0.6

0.9

2012
£m

0.3

0.9

1.2

Operating lease payments represent rentals and other charges payable by the Group for certain of its office properties. Leases are 
negotiated for an average term of five years and rentals are fixed for an average of one year.

22. Share-Based Payments
Annual Incentive Scheme
In 2013, following the reduction in scope of the LTIP scheme, the Annual Incentive Scheme was introduced to provide an element 
of short-term incentive. Some awards will include an element of IP Group shares, which will be subject to further time-based vesting 
over two years (typically 50% after year 1 and 50% after year 2). As at 31 December 2013 no such options or shares had been granted 
and there is no associated fair value. However, as the number shares to be granted are based as a percentage of employees’ salary, 
the share-based payments line includes the associated expense incurred in 2013.

Long-Term Incentive Plan (“LTIP”) awards 
Awards under the LTIP take the form of conditional awards of ordinary shares of 2p each in the Group which vest over the prescribed 
performance period to the extent that performance conditions have been met. The Remuneration Committee imposes objective 
conditions on the vesting of awards and these take into consideration the guidance of the Group’s institutional investors from time to 
time. Further information on the Group’s LTIP is set out in the Directors’ Remuneration Report set out on pages 53 to 70.

No LTIP awards were made in 2013. 

The 2012 LTIP awards will ordinarily vest on 31 March 2015, to the extent that the performance conditions have been met. The awards 
are based on the performance of Group’s Hard NAV and TSR. Both performance measures are combined into a matrix format to most 
appropriately measure performance relative to the business, as shown in the Directors’ Remuneration report on page 63. The total 
award is subject to an underpin based on the relative performance of the Group’s TSR to that of the FTSE Small Cap index, which can 
reduce the awards by up to 50%. The matrix is designed such that up to 100% of the award (prior to the application of the underpin) 
will vest in full in the event of both Hard NAV increasing by 15% per year on a cumulative basis from 1 January 2012 to 31 December 
2014 and TSR increasing by 15% per year on a cumulative basis from the date of award to 31 March 2015, using an industry-standard 
average price period at the beginning and end of the performance period. Further, the matrix is designed such that 30% of the award 
shall vest (again prior to the application of the underpin) if the cumulative increase is 8% per annum for both measures over their 
respective performance periods (“threshold performance”). A straight-line sliding scale is applied for performance between the distinct 
points on the matrix of vesting targets.

The 2011 LTIP awards will ordinarily vest on 31 March 2014, to the extent that the performance conditions have been met. Deloitte LLP 
provided independent external advice to IP Group’s Remuneration committee on the appropriate performance conditions to attach to 
the 2011 LTIP awards based on their experience of current market practice. The 2012 awards were designed using on the same matrix 
structure, together with the FTSE small-cap index underpin, as was incorporated into the 2011 LTIP.

The 2010 LTIP awards partially vested on 16 April 2013 and on this date shares in IP Group were issued via the Group’s employee 
benefit trust to the relevant members of the Company’s staff accordingly. 50% of the awards were based on the increase in IP Group’s 
Hard NAV, and 50% were based on IP Group’s share price performance. The table overleaf sets out the performance measures relating 
to the 2010 LTIP awards and the actual performance achieved.

101

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes22. Share-Based Payments continued

Performance condition

Hard NAV(i)

TSR performance (share price)

Total

Vesting criteria

£226.8m: 25%
£267.4m: 50%

60p: 25%
67p: 50%

Actual 
performance

Percentage 
vesting

£236.6m

119.9p

31%

50%

81%

Hard NAV target increased by the net proceeds of the Group’s 2011 placing plus 8%-15% growth from the date of completion of the 
placing.

The movement in the number of shares notionally awarded under the LTIP is set out below:

At 1 January

Forfeited during the year

Vested during the year

Notionally awarded during the year

At 31 December

2013

2012

18,000,923

17,055,803

(2,342,292)

(767,746)

(9,495,195)

—

—

1,712,866

6,163,436

18,000,923

No shares were notionally awarded during 2013. The fair value of awards made in the prior year was calculated using a Monte Carlo 
pricing model with the following key assumptions:

Share price at date of award

Exercise price

Fair value at grant date

Expected volatility (median of historical 50-day moving average)

Expected life (years)

Expected dividend yield

Risk-free interest rate

2012

£1.355

£nil

£0.38

35%

2.75

0%

1.1%

The fair value charge recognised in the statement of comprehensive income during the year in respect of LTIP share awards was 
£0.9m (2012: £0.8m).

23. Limited and Limited Liability Partnership Interests

At 1 January 2012

Additions during the year

Realisations in the year

Change in fair value during the year

At 1 January 2013

Additions during the year

Realisations in the year

Change in fair value during the year

At 31 December 2013

£m

3.3

0.4

(0.1)

0.4

4.0

0.2

(0.2)

0.8

4.8

The Group considers interests in limited and limited liability partnerships to be Level 3 in the fair value hierarchy throughout the 
current and previous financial years. If the assumptions used in the valuation techniques for the Group’s holding in each company 
are varied by using a range of possible alternatives, there is no material difference to the carrying value of the respective spin-out 
company. The effect on the consolidated statement of comprehensive income for the period is also not expected to be material.

102

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group Notes24. Related Party Transactions
The Group has various related parties arising from its key management, subsidiaries, equity stakes in portfolio companies and 
management of certain limited partnership funds.

a) Limited partnerships
The Group manages a number of investment funds structured as limited partnerships. Group entities have a limited partnership 
interest (see note 1) and act as the general partners of these limited partnerships. The Group therefore has power to exert significant 
influence over these limited partnerships. The following amounts have been included in respect of these limited partnerships:

Statement of comprehensive income

Revenue from services

Statement of financial position

Investment in limited partnerships

Amounts due from related parties

b) Key management transactions
The key management had investments in the following spin-out companies as at 31 December 2013:
Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January  
2013 

Company name

Director

Alan Aubrey

Amaethon Limited — A Shares

Amaethon Limited — B Shares

Amaethon Limited — Ordinary shares

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Evocutis plc

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Icona Solutions Limited

Ilika plc

Karus Therapeutics Limited

Mode Diagnostics Limited

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Oxtox Limited

Pharminox Limited

Photopharmica (Holdings) Limited1

Plexus Planning Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revise Limited

Revolymer plc

Salunda Limited

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Tracsis plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Limited

104 

11,966 

21 

20,276,113 

11,631 

26 

1,447 

15 

767,310 

15,000 

108,350 

1,674 

117,500 

223 

3,226 

1,185,150 

519,269 

2,172,809 

114,420 

25,363 

685 

37,020 

1,732 

37,160 

—

88,890 

53,639 

212 

393 

30 

2,389,259 

168,010 

122,109 

241 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(1,674)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

19 

—

—

—

—

—

—

(46,821)

(100,591)

—

2013
£m

1.3

2013
£m

3.6

—

Number of 
shares held at  
31 December 
2013

104 

11,966 

21 

20,276,113 

11,631 

26 

1,447 

15 

767,310 

15,000 

108,350 

—

117,500 

223 

3,226 

1,185,150 

519,269 

2,172,809 

114,420 

25,363 

685 

37,020 

1,732 

37,160 

19 

88,890 

53,639 

212 

393 

30 

2,389,259 

121,189 

21,518 

241 

2012
£m

1.4

2012
£m

2.8

—

%

3.1%

1.0%

0.3%

0.6%

0.8%

0.4%

0.1%

0.9%

0.4%

0.1%

0.8%

—

0.2%

0.1%

0.4%

2.1%

0.7%

1.1%

0.6%

0.3%

0.3%

1.0%

0.8%

0.1%

0.5%

0.2%

0.8%

1.0%

0.3%

1.2%

0.4%

0.5%

<0.1%

0.1%

103

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group Notes24. Related Party Transactions continued

Director

Company name

Mike Townend

Amaethon Limited — A Shares

Amaethon Limited — B Shares

Amaethon Limited — Ordinary shares

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Icona Solutions Limited

Ilika plc

Mode Diagnostics Limited

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Oxtox Limited

Photopharmica (Holdings) Limited1

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revise Limited

Revolymer plc

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Synairgen plc

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Tracsis plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Limited

Greg Smith

Avacta Group plc

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Encos Limited

Getech Group plc

Green Chemicals plc

Icona Solutions Limited

Mode Diagnostics Limited

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revise Limited

Revolymer plc

Summit Corporation plc

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Velocys plc

Xeros Limited

104

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January  
2013 

Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at  
31 December 
2013

104 

11,966 

21 

931,367

11,282 

23 

1,286 

14 

20,000

113,222 

1,515 

10,000

1,756 

1,185,150 

575,000 

932,994 

3,490 

25,363 

37,020 

37,160 

—

35,940 

212 

350 

28 

20,000

1,950,862 

70,004 

5,000

213 

390,407 

895 

3 

149 

4 

5,671 

8,000 

4,830 

148 

361 

313,425 

7,250 

150 

61,340 

—

4,500 

—

76 

9 

175,358 

2,559 

33 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(1,515)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

18 

—

—

—

—

—

—

(44,574)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(148) 

—

—

—

—

—

6 

—

15,972 

—

—

—

—

—

104 

11,966 

21 

931,367 

11,282 

23 

1,286 

14 

20,000 

113,222 

—

10,000 

1,756 

1,185,150 

575,000 

932,994 

3,490 

25,363 

37,020 

37,160 

18 

35,940 

212 

350 

28 

20,000 

1,950,862 

25,430 

5,000 

213 

390,407 

895 

3 

149 

4 

5,671 

8,000 

4,830 

—

361 

313,425 

7,250 

150 

61,340 

6 

4,500 

15,972 

76 

9 

175,358 

2,559 

33 

%

3.1%

1.0%

0.3%

<0.1%

0.8%

0.3%

0.1%

0.8%

<0.1%

0.8%

—

<0.1%

0.2%

2.1%

0.7%

0.5%

0.2%

0.3%

1.0%

0.1%

0.5%

0.1%

1.0%

0.2%

1.1%

<0.1%

0.3%

0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.2%

0.3%

<0.1%

<0.1%

—

<0.1%

0.6%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.4%

<0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Notes to the consolidated financial statements continuedOur Financials Group NotesDirector

Company name

Charles Winward

Amaethon Limited — A Shares

Amaethon Limited — B Shares

Amaethon Limited — Ordinary shares

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Chamelic Limited

Crysalin Limited

EmDot Limited

Encos Limited

Icona Solutions Limited

Mode Diagnostics Limited

Modern Biosciences plc

Modern Water plc

Oxford Advanced Surfaces Group plc

Oxford Nanopore Technologies Limited

Oxtox Limited

Photopharmica (Holdings) Limited1

Retroscreen Virology Group plc

Revise Limited

Revolymer plc

Structure Vision Limited

Surrey Nanosystems Limited

Sustainable Resource Solutions Limited

Tissue Regenix Group plc

Tracsis plc2

Xeros Limited

Bruce Smith

Capsant Neurotechnologies Limited

Evocutis plc

Getech Group plc

iQur Limited

Nanotecture Group plc

Synairgen plc

Velocys plc

Number of 
shares held at 
1 January  
2013 

Number of 
shares acquired/ 
(disposed) in the 
period

Number of 
shares held at  
31 December 
2013

15 

1,766 

3 

2,264 

3 

189 

5 

6,530 

376 

421 

360,914 

12,400 

156,213 

150 

3,742 

3,590 

66,080 

—

4,500 

26 

87 

10 

482,236 

56,500 

39 

20,724 

15,241 

15,000 

2,000 

50,000 

200,000 

10,000 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

(376)

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

6 

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

—

15 

1,766 

3 

2,264 

3 

189 

5 

6,530 

—

421 

360,914 

12,400 

156,213 

150 

3,742 

3,590 

66,080 

6 

4,500 

26 

87 

10 

482,236 

56,500 

39 

20,724 

15,241 

15,000 

2,000 

50,000 

200,000 

10,000 

%

0.5%

0.2%

<0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.3%

0.3%

—

0.1%

0.7%

<0.1%

0.1%

<0.1%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.2%

0.2%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.1%

0.4%

0.1%

0.2%

<0.1%

1.4%

<0.1%

0.1%

0.8%

0.5%

0.3%

<0.1%

1.  Photopharmica (Holdings) Limited was restructured in 2012 and its trade and assets were transferred to Photopharmica Limited.

2. 

In addition, Charles Winward holds options over 137,517 ordinary shares in Tracsis plc.

Compensation to key management comprises that paid to Executive and Non-executive directors of the Group. Full details of 
directors’ compensation are disclosed in the Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 70 and these amounts are included 
within the employee costs set out in note 8.

c) Portfolio companies
The Group earns fees from the provision of business support services and corporate finance advisory to portfolio companies in which 
the Group has an equity stake. The following amounts have been included in respect of these fees:

Statement of comprehensive income

Revenue from services

Statement of financial position

Trade receivables

2013
£m

0.7

2013
£m

0.3

2012
£m

0.9

2012
£m

0.3

105

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesNotes to the consolidated financial statements 
continued

24. Related Party Transactions continued 
d) Subsidiary companies
Subsidiary companies that are not 100% owned either directly or indirectly by the parent company have intercompany balances with 
other Group companies totalling as follows:

Intercompany balances with other Group companies

2013
£m

7.8

2012
£m

7.1

These intercompany balances represent funding loans provided by Group companies that are interest free, repayable on demand and 
unsecured.

25. Capital Management
The Group’s key objective when managing capital is to safeguard the Group’s ability to continue as a going concern so that it can 
continue to provide returns for shareholders and benefits for other stakeholders.

The Group sets the amount of capital in proportion to risk. The Group manages the capital structure and makes adjustments to it in 
the light of changes in economic conditions and the risk characteristics of its underlying assets. In order to maintain or adjust the 
capital structure, the Group may adjust the amount of issue new shares or dispose of interests in more mature portfolio companies.

During 2013, the Group’s strategy, which was unchanged from 2012, was to maintain healthy cash and short-term deposit balances 
that enable it to provide capital to all portfolio companies as determined by the Group’s investment committee, whilst having 
sufficient cash reserves to meet all working capital requirements in the foreseeable future.

26. Capital Commitments
Commitments to university partnerships
A number of the Group’s partnerships with research intensive universities in the UK include certain arrangements to provide seed 
capital to spin-out companies arising from such universities. As at 31 December 2013, the balances were as follows:

Partnership

University of Southampton(i)

King’s College London(ii)

University of York – CNAP(iii)

University of Leeds(iv)

University of Bristol(v)

University of Surrey(vi)

University of York(iii)

Queen Mary University of London(vii)

University of Bath(viii)

University of Glasgow(ix)

University of Manchester(x)

Year of
commencement
of partnership

Original
commitment 
£m

Invested to date 
£m

Remaining
commitment 
£m

2002

2003

2003

2005

2005

2006

2006

2006

2006

2006

2013

5.0

5.0

0.8

4.2

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

5.0

3.6

1.8

0.2

0.7

1.0

0.5

0.1

0.7

0.2

1.2

—

1.4

3.2

0.6

3.5

4.0

4.5

4.9

4.3

4.8

3.8

5.0

50.0

10.0

40.0

i.  Under the terms of an agreement entered into in 2002 between the Group, the University of Southampton and certain of the University of Southampton’s subsidiaries, IP2IPO 

Limited agreed to make £5.0m available for the purposes of making investments in University of Southampton spin-out companies. 

ii.  Under the terms of an agreement entered into during 2003 between the Group and King’s College London (“KCL”) and King’s College London Business Limited (formerly KCL 
Enterprises Limited), the Group agreed to make £5.0m available for the purposes of making investments in spin-out companies. Under the terms of this agreement, KCL was 
previously able to require the Company to make a further £5.0m available for investments in spin-out companies on the tenth anniversary of the partnership. However, the 
2003 agreement was terminated and replaced by a revised agreement between the same parties on 12 November 2010. Under the revised agreement, the Group has agreed 
to target investing the remaining commitment of £3.2m over a three-year period; KCL cannot, however, require the Group to make any additional funds available. Other 
changes effected by the revised agreement included the removal of the Group’s automatic entitlement to initial partner equity in every spin-out company and/or a share of 
KCL’s licensing fees from intellectual property commercialisation and to the termination rights of the parties.

iii. 

In 2003 the Group entered into an agreement with the University of York. The agreement relates to a specialist research centre within the University of York, the Centre for 
Novel Agricultural Products (“CNAP”). The Group has committed to invest up to a total of £0.8m in spin-out companies based on CNAP’s intellectual property. In 2006 the 
Group extended its partnership with the University of York to cover the entire university. The Group has committed to invest £5.0m in University of York spin-outs over and 
beyond the £0.8m commitment as part of the Group’s agreement with CNAP. The agreement with York was amended during the year so as to alter the process by which the 
Group evaluates commercialisation opportunities and the level of initial partner equity the Group is entitled to as a result. Further, the Group’s automatic entitlement to share in 
any of York’s proceeds from out-licensing has been removed from the agreement.

iv.  The Group extended its partnership with the University of Leeds in July 2005 by securing the right with associated contractual commitment to invest up to £5.0m in University 

of Leeds spin-out companies. This agreement was varied in March 2011 to, amongst other things, remove the Group’s entitlement to a share of out-licensing income 
generated by the University of Leeds except in certain specific circumstances where the Group is involved in the relevant out-licensing opportunity. Under the terms of the 
variation agreement, subject to quality and quantity of the investment opportunities, the Group, Techtran and the University of Leeds have agreed to target annual investments 
of at least £0.7m in aggregate and, subject to earlier termination or the parties otherwise agreeing alternative target, to review this target on 30 April 2017. 

106

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Our Financials Group Notesv. 

In December 2005, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Bristol. The Group has committed to invest up to a total of £5.0m in University of Bristol spin-
out companies. 

vi.  Under the terms of an agreement entered into in 2006 between the Group and the University of Surrey (“Surrey”), the Group has committed to invest up to a total of £5.0m in 

spin-out companies based on Surrey’s intellectual property. 

vii. 

viii. 

ix. 

x. 

In July 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with Queen Mary University of London (“QM”) to invest in QM spin-out companies. The Group has committed to invest 
up to a total of £5.0m in QM spin-out companies. The agreement was amended in January 2014 primarily to remove the Group’s entitlement to licence fees save where it 
is involved in the development or licensing of the relevant IP and in most cases to replace the Group’s automatic entitlement to a share of the initial equity in any spin-out 
company with an equivalent warrant exercisable at the seed stage of the relevant company.

In September 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Bath (“Bath”) to invest in Bath spin-out companies. The Group has committed to invest up to 
a total of £5.0m in Bath spin-out companies. The agreement with Bath was amended during 2009 so as to remove the Group’s automatic entitlement to a share of the initial 
equity or licence fees (as applicable) received by Bath from the commercialisation of its intellectual property in the event the Group and its employees have not been actively 
involved in developing the relevant opportunity.

In October 2006, the Group entered into an agreement with the University of Glasgow (”Glasgow”) to invest in Glasgow spin-out companies. The Group has committed to 
invest up to a total of £5.0m in Glasgow spin-out companies. 

In February 2013, the Group entered into a commercialisation agreement with the University of Manchester. Initially the Group had agreed to make available an initial facility of 
up to £5.0m to provide capital to new proof of principle projects (excluding grapheme projects) intended for commercialisation through spin-out companies. During January 
2014, the Group extended its agreement to include funding for Graphene projects, increased the capital commitment by a further £2.5m, bringing the total to £7.5m, and 
extended the agreement to 2019.

Commitments to limited partnerships
Pursuant to the terms of their limited partnership agreements, the Group has committed to invest the following amounts into limited 
partnerships as at 31 December 2013:

Partnership

IP Venture Fund

IP Venture Fund II L.P.

Year of 
commencement 
of partnership

Original 
commitment 
£m

Invested 
to date 
£m

Remaining 
commitment 
£m

2006

2013

3.1

10.0

13.1

2.7

0.4

3.1

0.4

9.6

10.0

107

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comOur Financials Group NotesCompany balance sheet
As at 31 December 2013

ASSETS

Fixed assets

Investment in subsidiary undertakings

Investment in associated undertakings

Other investments

Loans to subsidiary undertakings

Total assets

EQUITY AND LIABILITIES

Capital and reserves

Called up share capital

Share premium account

Merger reserve

Profit and loss reserve

Total equity shareholders’ funds and liabilities

Registered number: 4204490

Note

2013
£m

2012
£m

2

3

4

5

6

6

6

6

25.3

10.5

0.5

120.4

156.7

7.5

150.4

12.8

(14.0)

156.7

25.3

7.1

0.5

123.7

156.6

7.3

150.4

12.8

(13.9)

156.6

The financial statements on pages 108 to 111 were approved by the Board of Directors and authorised for issue on 3 March 2014 and 
were signed on its behalf by:

Greg Smith
Chief Financial Officer

Alan Aubrey
Chief Executive Officer

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
n
a
p
m
o
C

i

s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

108

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements 

1. Accounting Policies
The financial statements of the parent company have been prepared under the historical cost convention, in accordance with the 
Companies Act 2006 and applicable United Kingdom accounting standards. A summary of the more important accounting policies 
which have been applied consistently throughout the year are set out below.

Investments 
Investments are stated at historic cost less any provision for impairment in value and are held for long-term investment purposes.

Provisions are based upon an assessment of events or changes in circumstances that indicate that an impairment has occurred 
such as the performance and/or prospects (including the financial prospects) of the investee company being significantly below 
the expectations on which the investment was based, a significant adverse change in the markets in which the investee company 
operates or a deterioration in general market conditions.

Intercompany loans
All intercompany loans are initially recognised at fair value and subsequently measured at amortised cost. Where intercompany loans 
are intended for use on a continuing basis in the Company’s activities and there is no intention of their settlement in the foreseeable 
future, they are presented as fixed assets.

Impairment
If there is an indication that an asset might be impaired, the Company will perform an impairment review. An asset is impaired if 
the recoverable amount, being the higher of net realisable value and value in use, is less than its carrying amount. Value in use is 
measured based on future discounted cash flows (“DCF”) attributable to the asset. In such cases, the carrying value of the asset is 
reduced to recoverable amount with a corresponding charge recognised in the profit and loss account.

Financial instruments
Currently the Company does not enter into derivative financial instruments. Financial assets and financial liabilities are recognised and 
cease to be recognised on the basis of when the related titles pass to or from the Company. 

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
n
a
p
m
o
C

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

2. Investments in Subsidiary Undertakings

At 1 January 2013

Additions

Impairment

Disposals  

At 31 December 2013

Details of the Company’s subsidiary undertakings at 31 December 2013 are as follows:

£m

25.3

—

—

—

25.3

Name of subsidiary

IP2IPO Limited

IP2IPO Management Limited1

IP2IPO Management II Limited1

IP2IPO Management III Limited1,2

IP2IPO Management IV Limited1

IP2IPO Management V Limited1,2

IP2IPO Management VI Limited1

IP2IPO Management VII Limited1

IP2IPO Management VIII Limited1

IP2IPO Americas Limited

IP2IPO (Europe) Limited1

IP2IPO Guarantee Limited1,5

IP Group Inc.1 

Top Technology Ventures Limited3

Top Technology Ventures IV GP Ltd1,3

Place of incorporation 
(or registration) and operation

Proportion 
of ownership 
interest %

Proportion of 
voting power 
held %

Method used 
to account for 
investment

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

Delaware, USA

England and Wales

England and Wales

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

109

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
Notes to the financial statements 
continued

2. Investments in Subsidiary Undertakings continued

Name of subsidiary

Place of incorporation 
(or registration) and operation

Proportion 
of ownership 
interest %

Proportion of 
voting power 
held %

Method used 
to account for 
investment

IP Venture Fund GP Limited1,3

England and Wales

IP Ventures (Scotland) Limited1,3

Scotland

North East Technology (GP) Limited1,3

Techtran Group Limited

Techtran Investments Limited1,2

Techtran Services Limited1,2

Techtran Corporate Finance Limited1,2

Techtran Limited1,2

Modern Biosciences plc4

PIMCO 2664 Limited1,4

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

Modern Biosciences Nominees Limited1,2

England and Wales

MBS Secretarial Limited1,2

MBS Director Limited1,2

IP2IPO Nominees Limited2

IP2IPO Services Limited2

LifeUK (IP2IPO) Limited2

IP Industry Partners Limited2

Union Life Sciences Limited

1.  Company held indirectly.

2.  Dormant company.

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

England and Wales

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

54.3

54.3

54.3

54.3

54.3

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

80.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

69.0

69.0

69.0

69.0

69.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

100.0

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

Acquisition

80.0

Acquisition

3.  Company engaged in fund management activity.

4.  Company engaged in in-licensing of drugable intellectual property activity.

5.  Company limited by guarantee.

All companies above are incorporated in England with the exception of IP Ventures (Scotland) Limited which is incorporated in 
Scotland and IP Group Inc. which is incorporated in Delaware, USA. All companies above undertake the activity of commercialising 
intellectual property unless stated otherwise. 

3. Investment In Associated Undertakings

At 1 January 2013

Additions

Impairment

Disposals 

At 31 December 2013

£m

7.1

3.4

—

—

10.5

At 31 December 2013 the Company has investments where it holds 20% or more of the issued ordinary share capital of the following 
companies:

Undertaking

Fusion IP plc

Modern Water plc

% of issued share 
capital held

Net assets
£000

Loss before tax
£000

Date of financial 
statements

20.1%

20.0%

52,108

25,327

(1,204)

31 July 2013

(5,487) 31 December 2012

All companies are incorporated in England and Wales. 

Subsequent to 31 December 2013 the Group has proposed to acquire the remaining stake in Fusion IP plc, for paper, dependent on 
the approval of the OFT.

No profit/(loss) information is presented in respect of companies that have filed abbreviated accounts.

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
n
a
p
m
o
C

i

s
l
a
c
n
a
n
F
r
u
O

i

110

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013 
 
 
 
4. Other Investments

At 1 January 2013

Additions

Impairment

Disposals 

At 31 December 2013

5. Loans to Subsidiary Undertakings

At 1 January 2013

Repayment during the year

At 31 December 2013

£m

0.5

—

—

—

0.5

£m

123.7

(3.3)

120.4

s
t
n
e
m
e
t
a
t
S

y
n
a
p
m
o
C

s
l
a
i
c
n
a
n
i
F
r
u
O

The amounts due from subsidiary undertakings are interest free, repayable on demand and unsecured. 

6. Share Capital and Reserves

At 1 January 2013

Profit for the year

Issue of equity

At 31 December 2013

Share 
capital
£m

7.3

—

0.2

7.5

Share 
premium 
£m

150.4

—

—

150.4

Merger 
reserve
£m

12.8

—

—

12.8

Profit and loss 
reserve
£m

(13.9)

0.1

(0.2)

(14.0)

Details of the Company’s authorised share capital and changes in its issued share capital can be found in note 20 to the consolidated 
financial statements on page 100. Details of the movement in the share premium account can be found in the consolidated 
statement of changes in equity on page 83.

7. Profit and Loss Account
As permitted by Section 408 of the Companies Act 2006, the Company’s profit and loss account has not been included in these 
financial statements. The Company’s loss for the year was £0.1m (2012: £7.7m loss).

Details of auditor’s remuneration are disclosed in note 6 to the consolidated financial statements.

8. Directors’ Emoluments, Employee Information and Share-Based Payments
The remuneration of the directors is borne by Group subsidiary undertakings. Full details of their remuneration can be found in the 
Directors’ Remuneration Report on pages 53 to 70. Full details of the share-based payments charge and related disclosures can be 
found in note 22 to the consolidated financial statements.

The Company had no employees during 2013 or 2012. 

111

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.com 
 
 
 
Company information

Company registration number

4204490

Registered office

24 Cornhill
London
EC3V 3ND

Directors

Dr Bruce Gordon Smith CBE (Non-executive Chairman)

Alan John Aubrey (Chief Executive Officer)

Michael Charles Nettleton Townend (Chief Investment Officer)

Gregory Simon Smith (Chief Financial Officer)

Charles Stephen Winward (MD of Top Technology Ventures)

Mike Humphrey (Senior Independent Director)

Francis Adam Wakefield Carpenter (Non-executive Director)

Jonathan Brooks (Non-executive Director)

Professor Lynn Gladden (Non-executive Director)

Company secretary

Angela Leach

Numis Securities Limited
The London Stock Exchange
10 Paternoster Square 
London
EC4M 7LT

Capita Asset Services
The Registry
34 Beckenham Road
Beckenham
Kent BR3 4TU

Royal Bank of Scotland
PO Box 333
Silbury House
300 Silbury Boulevard
Milton Keynes 
MK9 2ZF

Pinsent Masons
CityPoint
One Ropemaker Street
London 
EC2Y 9AH

BDO LLP
55 Baker Street
London
W1U 7EU

Brokers

Registrars

Bankers

Solicitors

Independent auditor

112

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14IP Group plc Annual Report and Accounts for the year ended 31 December 2013Printed on Cocoon Silk 100.

A recycled paper containing 100% recycled waste and manufactured  
at a mill certified with ISO 14001 environmental management standard.

Fully recyclable and biodegradable.

The pulp used in this product is bleached using an Elemental Chlorine Free process. (ECF)

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14Stock Code: IPO   www.ipgroupplc.comI

P

G

r

o

u

p

p

l

c

A

n

n

u

a

l

R

e

p

o

r

t

a

n

d

A

c

c

o

u

n

t

s

2

0

1

3

IP Group plc
24 Cornhill
London
EC3V 3ND

T +44 (0)845 074 2929
F +44 (0)845 074 2928

www.ipgroupplc.com

23002-04    Proof 8a    01-04-14